Muratec Fax Machine MFX 1500E User Manual
Ser ies 41500E  
Plain-paper fax machines  
MFX-1500E Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Welcome …  
Th a n k you !  
Thanks for selecting a Muratec fax machine for your  
business.  
Befor e you begin , please note that before your fax can be  
used and before you can turn on power to the unit for the  
first time, there are important precautions to take. Please  
see page 1.7 for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks  
Muratec, the Muratec logo and all Muratec fax product names contained herein are  
trademarks of Muratec America, Inc.  
ENERGY STAR is a registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection  
Agency.  
Copyright  
Copyright © 1999 by Muratec Americ, Inc, All rights reserved.  
As an Energy Star® partner, Muratec America, Inc., has deter-  
mined that this product meets the Energy Star guidelines for  
energy efficiency.  
Super G3 is an extension of Group 3 fax technology standards,  
allowing the use of high-speed ITU-T V.34 bis modems for 33.6  
Kbps transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid handshak-  
ing.  
J BIG — Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T stan-  
dard image data compression method. As J BIG compresses the  
data more efficiently than MMR, it is especially effective when  
transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.  
This manual and any updates to it can be found online at w w w.m u r a tec.com  
Go to the “Products” section of this site, then click on “MFX-1500E”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before using your Muratec fax machine  
Clea n  
Where to set up your fax machine  
Dust buildup can damage your fax. Periodically  
clean your fax machine as described in the operating  
instructions. Do n ot u se a d u st cover, which can  
cause damaging overheating.  
Follow these guidelines when setting up your fax machine:  
Aw a y fr om d ir ect su n ligh t  
To avoid overheating, set up your fax machine away  
from direct sunlight or a heater.  
Nea r a p h on e ja ck  
Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) tele-  
phone jack, also known as an RJ -11.  
Level, a n d vibr a tion -fr ee  
To avoid damage to the machine or injuries, set the  
fax machine up in a level, vibration-free location.  
Sp a ce a r ou n d th e fa x m a ch in e  
To ensure proper ventilation and easy operation, set  
up the machine in an area that meets the minimum  
requirements for clearance as illustrated below.  
Avoid extr em e h igh / low tem p er a tu r e  
Use your fax machine within the temperature range  
of 50º F to 89.6º F (10º C to 32º C).  
50 - 89.6 F  
60 cm  
(23.6 inches)  
20 cm  
(7.9 inches)  
20 cm  
(7.9 inches)  
Aw a y fr om a television or r a d io  
Many appliances and office equipment, including  
televisions, radios, copy machines, air conditioners  
and computers, can generate electronic noise that  
can interfere with the operation of your fax  
machine.  
20 cm  
(7.9 inches)  
60 cm  
(23.6 inches)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power requirements  
General Precautions  
P lu g in th e p ow er cor d  
Never d isa ssem ble you r fa x m a ch in e!  
Plug the power cord carefully and completely into a  
wall outlet. Do not leave any portion of the electrical  
cord’s metal plugs exposed. Doing so could cause a  
fire and poses a risk of electrical shock.  
Disassembling your fax machine can cause serious  
injury to you and damage to your fax. If service is  
required, call your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Do n ot sh a r e a n exten sion cor d  
con n ector w ith oth er p lu gs  
It can cause electrical shock.  
Keep a w a y fr om liqu id s  
Keep liquids and metal pins or other objects away  
from your fax machine. If something falls into the  
fax machine, remove the plug from the outlet, and  
call your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Never h a n d le you r fa x m a ch in e or  
p ow er cor d w ith w et h a n d s  
Never touch your fax machine or power cord if your  
hands are wet.  
Do n ot sh a r e a n ou tlet w ith a la r ge  
a p p lia n ce  
High-consumption appliances such as a refrigerator  
or air conditioner can cause “draw-downs” which  
could damage your fax machine.  
Du r in g electr ica l stor m s, d iscon n ect  
th e p lu g fr om th e ou tlet  
Electrical storms can cause electrical shock or  
damage to the fax machine.  
120 VAC ou tlet  
Use a standard three-pronged 120 V electrical outlet  
to power your fax machine. Using any other electri-  
cal outlet will cause damage to your fax.  
AC 120V  
For d om estic u se on ly  
Never use your fax machine outside the country in  
which you purchased it. Doing so may violate  
telecommunication and safety regulations of that  
country, and variations in electrical and telephone  
standards can cause poor performance and damage  
to your fax.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do n ot p u t fu r n itu r e or equ ip m en t on  
th e p ow er cor d  
Do not put anything on or over the electrical power  
cord, and do not route the power cord under rugs or  
carpets. Doing so can damage the power cord or fax,  
and can cause fire or electrical shock.  
Storing and handling toner cartridges  
To avoid damage to your fax machine and to assure the best performance possible,  
follow these guidelines when storing and handling toner cartridges:  
Stor e th e ca r tr id ge  
Store toner cartridge at a constant temperature within a range of 50º F to 89.6º F  
(10º C to 32º C). Do not store cartridges in locations subject to extreme fluctuation of  
temperature and humidity.  
Avoid tem p er a tu r e flu ctu a tion s  
Sudden changes in temperature can cause damag-  
ing condensation to form inside your fax machine.  
Do n ot sta n d th e ca r tr id ge on its en d a n d d o n ot stor e it  
u p sid e d ow n .  
Do n ot op en th e p r otective ba g of th e ca r tr id ge u n til you a r e  
r ea d y to in sta ll th e ca r tr id ge.  
Allow clea r a n ce a r ou n d th e ou tlet  
Don’t stack boxes or furniture around the outlet.  
Do n ot stor e ca r tr id ges in a r ea s of:  
•
•
•
Direct sunlight  
Dusty conditions  
Near floppy disks or other computer media, computer screens, or any other mate-  
rials sensitive to magnetic fields.  
Do n ot bu r n ton er ca r tr id ges!  
The toner powder is extremely flammable. Exposure to  
flame can cause toner cartridges to burn or explode, causing  
serious injury.  
Use ca u tion w h en ca r r yin g th e fa x  
Lift and carry the fax machine as described in your  
operating instructions. Some fax machines require  
two people to safely and properly carry.  
Be ca r efu l n ot to get th e ton er p ow d er in  
you r eyes.  
If the toner powder gets in your eyes, wash your eyes well  
and see a doctor.  
Use su p p lies m a n u fa ctu r ed  
sp ecifica lly for Mu r a tec fa x m a ch in es  
Using toner cartridges and other supplies that are  
not manufactured specifically for Muratec machines  
may affect the operation of your unit.  
Keep ca r tr id ges a w a y fr om w a ter or oil.  
Do n ot exp ose ca r tr id ges to d ir ect su n ligh t.  
Do n ot exp ose ton er ca r tr id ges to sta tic or  
oth er electr ica l sh ock .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This page intentionally blank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Welcome to your Muratec fax machine!  
These instructions are divided into three sections.  
Find your serial number and write it down  
•
“Gettin g sta r ted ” (page 1.1) covers only what you must know to  
Please note that your  
machine’s serial number is  
located on the bar code  
label as shown on the  
drawing at right. Use the  
blank at the bottom of this  
column to copy this down  
before you set up your  
machine.  
use your machine immediately.  
•
“Beyon d th e ba sics” (page 2.1) provides more details. When you  
have time, look through it to learn more about your machine’s  
many features.  
•
Finally, “J u st in ca se … ” (page 3.1) helps you if you ever have a  
problem with your machine. It also tells you how to give your  
machine the kind of easy, sensible care that should keep troubles to  
a minimum.  
Note: The IC label and ID  
IC label Bar code label ID label  
label do not contain  
serial number information.  
Thanks for choosing Muratec.  
Close up, the bar code label looks some-  
thing like this, but with a different set of  
numbers:  
Please copy down your machine’s serial number below for future reference, and note  
the machine’s model number:  
My machine’s serial number: ________________________________________  
My machine’s model number: Muratec MFX-1500E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Getting started  
How to copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29  
Setting of enlargement or reduction for copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31  
Copy protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31  
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
Dialing with the monitor speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
EasyDial directory dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
Checking the fax reception mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
Dialing in the event of a power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
A quick introduction to fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1  
Packaging contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
Parts of the Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
The keys and their functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Pick an installation spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Power tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Removing the transport screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Installing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Attach the paper-handling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Plug in and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12  
Turn off the transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12  
Adjust the monitor speaker’s volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Attaching an optional handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Attaching a second phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15  
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15  
Clearing stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15  
Entering initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15  
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17  
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17  
Sending a fax using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19  
Sending a fax using the FBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20  
Sending a fax using monitor/call or a handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21  
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22  
Review Commands, an introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23  
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24  
Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24  
Tel Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24  
Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25  
Fax/Tel Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25  
Tel/Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26  
Ans/Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26  
If the paper runs out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27  
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28  
Making copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28  
Beyond the basics  
Entering settings for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
Scan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
Using code to enter characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2  
Print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2  
Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3  
Setting the number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4  
Setting ecm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4  
Setting silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4  
Setting the confirmation stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5  
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Printing your settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Printing a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Autodialer basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Call groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8  
Using one-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8  
Using speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11  
Printing a call group directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14  
EasyDial directory dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15  
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16  
Broadcasting basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16  
Delayed broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16  
Making changes to broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16  
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Setting up a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Reviewing or canceling delayed commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18  
Printing a delayed command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19  
Printing a stored document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20  
Creating or modifying a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20  
Printing a list of batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21  
Storing a document for batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21  
Printing a list of stored batch documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21  
Printing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22  
Erasing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22  
Erasing an empty batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23  
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24  
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24  
Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25  
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28  
Setting the activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29  
Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30  
Quick Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31  
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31  
OneLine + distinctive ring detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33  
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34  
Numbering pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
Transferring documents (Fax Forward) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
The power of QuadAccess® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37  
F-Code communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38  
F-Code: an introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38  
Creating or modifying an F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38  
Printing a list of F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42  
Printing a list of documents stored in your F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42  
Using a bulletin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42  
Using a security box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44  
Using a relay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45  
Erasing an empty F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45  
F-Code transmission and polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46  
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48  
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48  
Programming a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48  
Programming a broadcast / group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49  
Programming regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50  
Programming a batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51  
Programming an F-Code transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52  
Programming F-Code polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53  
Fax dialing with programmable one-touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54  
Erasing a programmable one-touch key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54  
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55  
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
The passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
Masking the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57  
Setting security transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59  
Setting for use with a closed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60  
Setting Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60  
Using department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62  
Just in case …  
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1  
If an original document jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1  
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
LCD error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9  
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12  
Cleaning tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12  
Corrective cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12  
Cleaning the FBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
Cleaning the LED print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
Storing the toner and drum cartridge(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14  
General questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14  
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14  
We’re here to help you! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14  
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15  
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16  
Working with your answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16  
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16  
How your fax machine works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1  
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.3  
Limited warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.4  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
A quick trip  
through the basics  
of your Muratec fax machine  
A quick introduction to fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1  
Packaging contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
Parts of the Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
The keys and their functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15  
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17  
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24  
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28  
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
A quick introduction to fax  
What’s a fax document?  
A fax document is anything a fax user wants to fax to someone else. It can be one or  
more pages, and it can be text, a drawing or even a copy of a photograph.  
What’s a fax number?  
Because your fax operates on standard phone lines, a fax number is just a regular  
phone number. And because your fax is also a high-quality, full-featured telephone,  
your fax number can be your regular phone number.  
What are resolution and grayscale?  
Just as cars are measured by engine size, fax machines are measured by resolution  
and grayscale.  
Resolution refers to the sharpness of a fax transmission. It’s expressed in lines per  
inch (lpi). There are at least three levels of resolution for most fax machines:  
•
•
•
Normal (203 horizontal × 98 vertical lpi)  
Fine (203 × 196 lpi)  
Superfine (406 × 392 lpi).  
Grayscale levels, or shades of gray — refers to the many shades of gray your fax  
machine sees on a document it’s sending. It’s likely most of your fax documents will  
be dark text on white paper. However, when you want to send photographs and  
other shaded items, you can send your fax documents with 256-level grayscale.  
Why not always set your fax machine for superfine,  
or for grayscale?  
Setting your fax machine for superfine resolution and grayscale mode makes your  
machine send more information, making transmissions last longer and potentially  
driving up your phone bills on long-distance calls. You’ll find that we’ve made it  
easy for you to set your fax machine for the most efficient and truest transmission  
for the types of documents you send.  
1.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Packaging contents  
Parts of the Fax  
Note: Any terms used here that are unclear to you right now will be explained in  
detail in the coming pages.  
10  
Main unit  
Document hopper  
Paper tray  
Multi paper tray  
16  
13  
12  
14  
11  
15  
10  
Telephone line cord  
AC power cord  
Drum cartridge  
Toner cartridge  
9
8
Soft Key  
Stamp  
Stamp  
Report  
Report  
Memory Tx  
TTI Tx  
Memory Tx  
TTI Tx  
Cover page Cover page  
Flash Flash  
1
Fuser cleaner  
Paper size stickers  
One-touch labels  
Soft key labels  
7
2
6
3
4
Protection seals  
Operating instructions  
5
Included in your machine’s packaging:  
❑ Main unit with 400-sheet paper cassette installed  
Liqu id cr ysta l d isp la y (LCD) — Shows the machine’s status and lets you  
see what you’re programming into the machine. The display shows 2 lines, 20  
characters per line. If the LCD is blank, the machine is off.  
1
❑ Document hopper  
❑ Paper tray  
❑ Paper size stickers  
❑ One-touch labels  
❑ Soft Key labels  
Con tr ol Pa n el — The keys you use to operate your fax machine. (See pages  
1.4–1.6 for more details.)  
2
3
❑ Multi paper tray  
❑ Telephone line cord  
❑ AC power cord  
❑ Drum cartridge  
❑ Toner cartridge  
❑ Fuser cleaner  
❑ Operating instructions  
Pa p er ca ssette — One of two locations where you put the recording paper  
(the Multi paper tray is the other). Holds up to 400 sheets, either letter or  
legal-sized paper.  
❑ Protection seals (This seal may actually be  
used when your authorized dealer installs  
your fax machine.)  
Recor d in g p a p er level in d ica tor — Shows the level of the current paper  
supply without requiring you to open the paper cassette.  
4
5
Or igin a l d ocu m en t exit — Where your original document comes out after  
being scanned.  
Note: Be sure to save the box (or boxes) and packing materials for reshipment.  
1.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Sid e cover — Open to fix a printout jam.  
6
7
24  
Mu lti p a p er tr a y — One of two locations where you put the recording paper  
(the paper cassette is the other). Holds only one sheet, either letter, legal or  
half-letter size paper.  
Top cover r elea se — Pull up on this to open the top cover.  
8
9
Top cover — Opens to provide access for changing the toner and drum car-  
tridge (or, occasionally, fixing printout jams).  
23  
Book -cover — Opens to scan an original document using the flatbed scanner  
(FBS).  
10  
11  
12  
13  
Docu m en t tr a y — Holds original documents placed for scanning into the  
machine for faxing/copying.  
22  
Docu m en t gu id es — Adjust these to fit the width of the original document  
so it will feed properly into the machine.  
21  
LINE PHONE2 PHONE1  
Au tom a tic d ocu m en t feed er (ADF ) — The slot into which you place your  
original document for faxing or copying. It holds up to 50 sheets of letter-sized  
paper, 25 pages of legal-sized paper or 15 pages of 11″ × 17″ (ledger or  
tabloid)-sized paper.  
20  
17 18 19  
Sca n n er cover — Opens this by using the scanner cover release to remove  
original document paper jams.  
14  
LINE ja ck — Where you plug in the telephone line cord. The other end of the  
cord plugs into a wall telephone jack.  
17  
18  
Sca n n er cover r elea se — Pull up on this to open the scanner cover.  
15  
16  
P HONE2 ja ck — If you connect a second telephone to your machine, this is  
where you plug in the cord.  
F la tbed sca n n er (F BS) — Makes it possible for you to fax or copy objects and  
even irregularly shaped sheets, just as on a conventional copier.  
P HONE1 ja ck — Where you plug in the optional handset.  
AC p ow er ja ck — Where you plug in the ac power cord.  
AC p ow er sw itch — Turns your fax machine on and off.  
Pa p er tr a y — Holds up the printout after it emerges.  
P r in ted d ocu m en t exit — Where the printout emerges.  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Op tion a l h a n d set — Used for voice communication. This handset is avail-  
able from your authorized Muratec dealer, and can be added when you  
purcahse the MFX-1500E or as an upgrade afterward.  
1.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
The keys and their functions  
Im p or ta n t: Some of the functions mentioned here are covered in the “Beyond the  
PAP ER J AM ligh t — Glows when a printed page jams in your fax machine.  
basics” section.  
7
8
AUTO ANSWER ligh t — Glows when auto-answer mode is active. In this mode,  
the machine answers automatically as a fax machine.  
REP LACE PAP ER ligh t — Glows when the paper cassette is empty. See pages  
1.10–1.11 for details on replacing paper.  
1
MEMORY RECEIVE ligh t — Glows when the machine is receiving an incoming  
fax document into its electronic memory.  
Soft Keys — Shortcut keys. Any function that can be turned on or off can be  
programmed into these three keys. If the light above one of these keys glows,  
this indicates the setting that’s been programmed into it (see page 2.24) is  
turned on. These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following  
functions on or off:  
2
9
COMMUNICATION ligh t — Glows when the fax machine is communicating with  
another machine.  
3
REVIEW COMMANDS — Press to review pending fax commands or to view a  
brief description of delayed commands.  
4
Soft key 1: STAMP — Press this key to set the machine to stamp each original  
document or page automatically when the machine scans it successfully.  
MONITOR/CALL — Turns the monitor speaker off or on. When it’s on, it allows  
you to hear the call you’re making. When using this feature, you can only hear  
the communication taking place. You cannot be heard unless you use a hand-  
set (optional). When sending a fax, this key also activates the call request  
feature.  
5
Soft key 2: REP ORT — Press to turn the confirmation report feature on or off  
for the next fax transmission.  
Soft key 3: MEMORY TRANSMISSION — Selects which transmission mode your  
fax machine uses, whether from memory or from the document feeder.  
ALARM ligh t — Glows when a problem occurs during fax communication,  
printing or scanning. The light stays on until the machine prints a Check  
Message report.  
Nu m er ic k eyp a d — Just like the numeric keys on a regular tone-dialing  
phone. Use these to dial phone and fax numbers and to enter numbers when  
you’re setting up the machine.  
6
10  
1.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
START — Press to begin a fax transmission or reception.  
In Fax mode:  
11  
12  
13  
23  
24  
— Scrolls (moves) through features and command options as displayed on  
the LCD.  
CLEAR ALL — Resets copying settings to their defaults.  
Or, in Copy mode:  
STOP — An all-purpose “Whoa!” key. Stops the current operation and ejects a  
document from the document feeder.  
Press  
to decrease the reduction or enlargement rate at 1% interval.  
While scanning a document:  
NEXT — Press to tell your machine to scan one or more additional documents  
after the current scanning ends.  
BROADCAST — Press to send a broadcast fax (sending the same document to  
more than one location).  
14  
15  
16  
BOOK DOC SIZE — Instructs the fax to scan either letter- or legal-sized docu-  
ments when you use the flatbed scanner.  
In Fax mode:  
COMMUNICATION OP TIONS — Chooses from among several fax options: delayed  
transmission, SecureMail transmission, relay broadcast, polling, batch trans-  
mission or F-Code communication.  
SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX — Starts a speed-dialing operation, which you finish by  
pushing three of the keys on the numeric keypad. Also displays one-touch and  
speed-dial entries sorted alphanumerically, as in a telephone directory.  
Or, in Copy mode:  
CANCEL — Press to delete characters on the LCD and cancel commands you  
have entered into the machine.  
REDUCE% — Press this key to choose one of several preset copy reduction  
rates. (See page 1.31 for more information.)  
17  
18  
In Fax mode:  
RESOLUTION — Press to toggle among the three resolution modes and  
grayscale.  
25  
26  
27  
REDIAL/PAUSE — Redials the last number you dialed. In certain operations, it  
also produces a special pause character which can be useful when dialing  
long-distance numbers.  
CONTRAST — Press to enter the contrast setting mode. To change the contrast  
level, press  
or  
keys.  
Or, in Copy mode:  
PAP ER SIZE? — Selects the printout paper you want to use.  
COP Y/F AX — Press this key to toggle between Fax mode or Copy mode.  
ENTER — Much as STOP is a “Whoa!” key, ENTER is a “Go!” key. It confirms user  
settings, begins operations and moves through command levels.  
19  
20  
In Fax mode:  
DIALING OP TIONS — Press this to insert special symbols into telephone num-  
bers (see page 2.7).  
Or, in Copy mode:  
SORT COP Y — Press this key to toggle the sorting of printed copies.  
In Fax mode:  
21  
22  
/P ROGRAM — Scrolls (moves) through features and command options as dis-  
played on the LCD.  
Or, in Copy mode:  
Press  
to increase the reduction or enlargement rate at 1% intervals.  
In Fax mode:  
GROUP DIAL — Press this to set up a fax transmission to a call group, a set of  
fax numbers which will receive the same document in one fax operation.  
Or, in Copy mode:  
ENLARGE% — Press this key to choose one of several fixed copy enlargement  
rates. (See page 1.31 for more information.)  
1.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Operating tips  
MACRO  
MACRO 1  
MACRO 2  
07 G  
MACRO 3  
08 H  
41 &  
42 SPACE  
43 (  
44 )  
01 A  
09 I  
17 Q  
25Y  
33  
02 B  
10 J  
18 R  
26 Z  
34  
03 C  
11 K  
19 S  
27  
04 D  
12 L  
20T  
28  
PROGRAM  
To press: 0 (zero), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, # or *  
05 E  
06 F  
49 "  
50 $  
58 [  
51 %  
59 ]  
52 ;  
60 {  
Use:  
Tip:  
The numeric keypad.  
At no other time within this manual will we refer to the letters printed  
below the numeric keys and their uses (such as accessing abc by pressing  
the 2 key.) These letters are there only for your convenience in using your  
fax machine as a telephone.  
57 @  
13 M  
21 U  
29  
14 N  
22 V  
30  
15 O  
23 W  
31  
16 P  
24 X  
32  
65  
73  
66  
74  
67  
75  
68  
76  
35  
36  
To press:  
Use:  
Tip:  
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
or any other letter key  
The one-touch key labeled with that letter.  
Please don’t confuse the zero (0) with the letter  
fliptab a  
fliptab b  
O.  
Here’s an example. If we say “press /P ROGRAM, 7, ENTER, 0, 8, ENTER” …  
Ma cr o Keys — Programming the Macro keys (MACRO 1 – MACRO 3) can  
28  
29  
reduce many steps of the operation to a simple press of a key. You can “teach”  
the Macro keys to carry out one of the several operations (see pages  
2.25–2.27).  
… you’d press  
… then  
/P ROGRAM  
7
… then ENTER  
… then 0 (the numeric key zero)  
On e-Tou ch Keys — The keys labeled 01-36 (or 37-72, if you’re using fliptab  
B) offer one-touch dialing convenience. You also can use the keys labeled 73-  
76, if you’re using fliptab B, for programmable functions: this lets you teach  
your machine an advanced multi-step function just once, then recall the func-  
tion at any time by pressing one of these keys.  
… then  
8
… and then ENTER  
Im p or ta n t: Even though our example above includes commas, do not enter them  
into the fax machine. Those characters appear in our instructions to  
separate one number from the other. They do not need to be entered  
into your fax machine.  
There is a function (broadcasting) which requires commas to be  
entered, but there is a special way to enter them. We’ll explain this  
process later.  
1.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting up  
Pick an installation spot  
Removing the transport screws  
Your fax machine is shipped with transport screws for protecting your fax machine’s  
mirror carriage during shipping.  
Where should you install your fax machine? The location should be:  
•
•
Clea n — Dust buildup can damage your machine. (However, do not use a cover!)  
In th e op en — Allow at least 12 inches of clearance around your machine. Be  
Im p or ta n t: Be sure that you do not turn the power on until after you have  
sure that you never cover the machine. Its vents must be able to “breathe.”  
removed the transport screws. Otherwise, damage could result.  
•
•
Aw a y fr om d ir ect su n ligh t — This helps avoid overheating.  
Remove the four transport screws, as shown.  
1
Dr y — Avoid any location where splatters or sprays (such as from a water foun-  
tain) could reach your fax machine.  
•
•
Level, a n d vibr a tion -fr ee.  
Nea r a p h on e ja ck — Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) telephone  
jack, also known as an RJ -11.  
•
Nea r a n a c p ow er ou tlet — The ac power cord is about 5 feet long when  
stretched to its limit, and the power cord should never be stretched to its limit.  
Power tips  
• Use a sta n d a r d th r ee-p r on ged 120 VAC ou tlet.  
• Ma k e su r e th e ou tlet isn ’t con tr olled by a w a ll sw itch .  
If it is, you’ll risk occasional shutoffs to the machine, causing you  
to lose fax messages.  
• Don ’t u se a n ou tlet w h ich a lso is su p p lyin g p ow er to a  
la r ge a p p lia n ce, such as a refrigerator or air conditioner.  
Such high-consumption appliances can cause “draw-downs”  
(temporary drops in the power available for other equipment on  
the circuit) which could damage your fax machine.  
Get the protection seals from your manual kit, and attach one protection seal  
on each transport screw’s now-open hole. This shields the hole while you are  
using the machine.  
2
IMP ORTANT: BEF ORE YOU USE THE MACHINE, YOU MUST  
TURN OF F THE TRANSP ORT MODE (see p a ge 1.12).  
•
Use a n electr ica l su r ge su p p r essor , preferably one which guards both tele-  
phone and electrical lines. This device helps to shield your fax machine from  
damaging high-voltage electrical surges.  
Note: Be sure to save the screws for reshipment. If you must ship your machine  
for some reason, turn on the transport mode, turn the power off and then  
undo the above procedure as follows:  
Volta ge r equ ir em en ts:  
Pow er con su m p tion :  
120 VAC ± 10%, 50–60% Hz.  
— Remove the seals (reversing step 2);  
— Reinstall the screws (reversing step 1).  
Standby Transmission Reception  
Copying Maximum*  
840 1180  
19  
W
51  
W
830  
W
W
W
* ; simultaneous copying, communicating and scanning  
1.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Installing the printing supplies  
Your fax prints incoming faxes and copies with a reliable 400 dpi print engine. Your  
fax requires two types of printing supplies (sometimes also called consumables):  
Place the new toner cartridge on a flat, clean surface.  
Unpack the drum cartridge from its carton.  
4
5
Note: Shield the drum cartridge from light, especially strong light. Later, if  
you have to remove the cartridge from the fax, immediately wrap it in  
a thick cloth to protect it from light.  
•
The drum cartridge — It yields 20,000 normal letter-sized printouts (see  
“Specifications,” page AI.1). By “normal,” we’re referring to the amount of text  
and/or graphics on each page. This is based on an industry-standard test docu-  
ment.  
Set the drum cartridge on the toner car-  
tridge, making sure that the drum  
cartridge’s two pins fit in the slits inside  
the toner cartridge frame.  
•
The toner cartridge — It yields 10,000 “normal”, letter-sized printouts (see  
“Specifications,” page AI.1).  
6
7
8
To install these supplies:  
Note: Do not touch the developing  
roller.  
Developing roller  
Pull up the top cover release and open  
the top cover.  
1
Grip toner cartridge as shown, to avoid  
pinching your fingers between the toner  
cartridge and the printer frame. Keep  
the drum slot free of dust and other for-  
eign materials.  
Keep the drum slot  
free of dust and  
other foreign materials.  
Pull up the printer  
2
cover release and  
Do not touch the  
drum surface on  
the cartridge’s bottom.  
open the printer  
cover.  
Gently install the toner car-  
tridge in the printer, making  
sure the toner cartridge's four  
pins fit in the slits inside the  
printer frame.  
Unpack a new toner cartridge from its  
carton. Then, holding the toner car-  
tridge with both hands, slowly shake it  
as shown (note the arrows).  
3
Note: Do not throw the toner cartridge  
into the fire; this will avoid any  
possibility of ignition and/or  
injury.  
1.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Attach the paper-handling parts  
Insert the fuser cleaner into the slot in  
the fuser unit. The fuser cleaner cleans  
the fuser unit roller.  
9
Attach the document tray by inserting it  
1
into the appropriate holes, as shown.  
You should replace the fuser cleaner  
every time you change the new toner  
cartridge.  
Gently clean the LED print head using  
the cleaning paper.  
10  
Attach the Multi paper tray by inserting  
its two pegs at a slightly upward angle  
into the appropriate holes, as shown.  
2
Close the printer cover.  
11  
12  
Close the top cover. Be sure to push on a portion of the cover to lock it into its  
original (closed) position.  
Attach the paper tray by inserting its  
two pegs at a slightly upward angle into  
the appropriate holes, as shown.  
3
Note: The fax machine will not work if the cover isn’t closed properly.  
1.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting for legal-sized paper  
Your fax comes set for letter-sized paper. To set it to use legal-sized paper:  
Loading paper  
Your machine’s standard paper cassette can hold up to 400 sheets at a time. Each  
optional cassette, available from your Muratec dealer at the time of purchase or as  
an upgrade, can hold an extra 200 sheets. In addition to boosting your total paper  
supply, adding an extra paper cassette allows your fax machine to use two types of  
paper, letter and legal, for example, at the same time.  
Unlock the pin from the upper set of  
holes by reaching inside of the paper  
cassette and pressing the nib, as shown.  
1
Loading the paper cassette  
Before you load paper, note the following:  
Remove the pin.  
2
•
•
The paper cassette can be adjusted to accept letter- or legal-sized paper.  
Before you load the cassette, you will need to “tell” your fax machine which size  
of paper, letter- or legal-sized, you will be loading. You can do this by setting a pin  
located on the rear side of the paper cassette.  
Insert the pin into the middle  
3
set of holes. You will hear a click  
when it is locked into place.  
Note:If you will be using letter-sized paper, there’s no need to adjust the cas-  
sette; your fax is initially set for this paper size. Simply attach the LTR  
sticker to the outside of the paper cassette.  
Pull the paper cassette com-  
pletely out of your fax.  
1
Install the paper guide into the  
4
holes corresponding to the paper  
size you are installing.  
Im p or ta n t: Remember, you’ve now told your fax that the paper cassette  
holds legal-sized paper. If you now try to use letter-sized paper  
without returning the pin to the upper holes (the setting for let-  
ter-sized), your fax will sound an alarm tone and display the  
following message when you try to print:  
Press here to  
release the cassette  
On the rear side of the cassette, you will see the pin and three sets of holes.  
Note the drawing below. If the pin is in the upper and lower set of holes, your  
fax “thinks” the cassette holds letter-sized paper. If the pin is in the middle  
and lower holes, your fax thinks the cassette has legal-sized paper.  
2
Check Rx Paper Size  
Open&Close Top Cover  
Be sure to attach the LGL sticker to the outside of the cassette to remind you  
which paper size it contains.  
5
Letter size  
Legal size  
Spare pin  
1.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Installing paper  
Attach the paper size sticker on the cassette’s front.  
5
Open the paper cassette from the front  
Paper level  
indicator  
The paper level indicator on the front paper cas-  
1
of your fax by gently pulling it toward  
you.  
sette lets you see how much paper is in the  
cassette without your having to open the cassette.  
When you see the paper level indicator drop (i. e.,  
show more dark area), make sure you have a sup-  
ply of paper nearby. Then, when you see the  
“Please Supply Paper” message on the display,  
you’ll be ready to refill the cassette.  
Im p or ta n t: To avoid paper jams, do not refill this tray without first removing all  
of any paper which may remain in it. In other words, do not just add  
sheets to an already-loaded stack.  
Insert the paper into the cassette.  
2
Note: Before you insert paper in the  
cassette, stack it so the leading  
edge and sides of the paper are  
even.  
Loading the multi paper tray for copying  
You may use letter-, legal- and half-letter sized paper in the multi paper tray, which  
the machine uses for copying only, not for faxing.  
•
Make sure the stack of paper isn’t  
higher than the limit mark on the  
side of the cassette.  
Im p or ta n t: If loading transparency (OHP) film into the multi paper tray, be sure  
that the sheet is designed for laser printers and not for copiers. Also,  
be sure that the film does not have a paper backing and/or a leading  
strip. If it does, remove the paper backing and/or strip before insert-  
ing. Only film should go in, not film with any backing or strip.  
•
•
Place the edges of the top sheet under the metal tabs on the cassette’s left  
and right side (as viewed from its front, as shown).  
The paper cassette can hold about 400 sheets of paper.  
Note: Each of the two optional additional cassettes can hold about 200  
sheets of paper. Thus, you can have as many as 800 sheets of paper  
“on-line.” For more details on these and other options for your fax  
machine, please contact your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Adjust the multi paper tray for the width of paper you plan to load, by sliding  
the guide to the slot for the paper size you’ll be loading.  
1
Insert a sheet into the multi paper  
tray until it won’t go in any farther.  
2
Note: The multi-purpose tray can  
hold only one sheet of paper  
at a time.  
Check the front corners of the paper  
stack and make sure they are below the  
tabs.  
3
4
Push the paper cassette back into its original (closed) position. You’ll feel a  
click when it’s properly in place.  
1.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Plug in and power up  
Turn off the transport mode  
Im p or ta n t: Be sure you do not turn the power on until after you remove the  
Im p or ta n t: Be sure you do not turn the power on until after you remove the  
transport screws. (See “Removing the transport screws,” page 1.7.)  
transport screws. (See “Removing the transport screws,” page 1.7.)  
To turn off the transport mode:  
Plug one end of the telephone line  
cord into the LINE jack on the  
machine’s rear side. Plug the other  
end of the cord into a standard tele-  
phone wall jack, just as you would  
plug in a phone.  
1
Power up the machine.  
If the machine is already in Fax mode, skip to step 3.  
If the machine is in Copy mode, proceed to step 2.  
1
Press COP Y/F AX to switch the machine to Fax mode.  
2
3
Press P ROGRAM, *,  
E
.
Note: If you have purchased an  
optional handset, do not con-  
fuse its curled handset cord  
with the uncurled telephone  
line cord.  
Mirror Locked :On  
Program/Enter  
Select Off by pressing P ROGRAM. Then press ENTER to turn off the transport  
mode. The mirror carriage will move to the home position.  
4
Plug the non-pronged end of the AC  
power cord into the AC power cord jack on the left side of the machine.  
2
Mirror Locked :Off  
Program/Enter  
Plug the pronged end of the AC power cord into a 120 V electrical outlet  
(preferably on a surge suppressor, as mentioned on page 1.7).  
3
Im p or ta n t: If you must reship the machine to any other location, turn on this  
mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position (in step 4,  
above, press program to set the transport mode to On), then power off  
and mount the mirror carriage using the four transport screws.  
Im p or ta n t: Be sure that you do not turn the power on (next step) until after  
you have removed the transport screws (see page 1.7).  
Use the AC power switch to turn on your machine. The markings are interna-  
tional standards: I means on, O means off.  
4
It will take a few seconds for the machine to warm up. The display will show:  
** Please Wait **  
When the machine is ready to use (standby mode), you will see either . . .  
Fax Ready  
or  
Jan 1 2000 0:00  
Fax mode  
Copy mode  
If the machine beeps, its ALARM light glows and the display shows an error message,  
this means there is a problem of some sort. Please consult “Just in case...,” begin-  
ning on page 3.1.  
1.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Adjust the monitor speaker’s volume  
You can set the volume of the monitor speaker, assuring that on-hook dialing will be  
as loud (or as soft) as you require.  
Attaching an optional handset  
You may purchase an optional handset for your fax machine. Here is how to attach  
the handset.  
Press MONITOR/CALL on the control panel. You now should hear a dial tone,  
and the display will show:  
Im p or ta n t: Do not connect the handset directly to a telephone wall jack. Instead,  
1
connect it only to your fax, as these instructions describe.  
** Tel Mode **  
Remove the two screw caps and screws.  
1
Im p or ta n t: If you don’t hear a dial tone, make sure your fax machine is  
plugged into a working phone line.  
If the volume you hear is satisfactory, skip to step 4.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 3.  
2
Adjust the volume as you wish:  
To turn the volume up, press  
To turns the volume down, press  
3
.
.
Using a Phillips-head screwdriver,  
attach the handset cradle to the rear  
side of your machine, using the screws  
included with the cradle.  
2
The LCD indicates the volume. Here are the possible settings:  
** Tel Mode **  
= Loudest setting.  
■■  
■■  
■■  
Volume:  
** Tel Mode **  
= Medium setting.  
= Low setting.  
= Volume off.  
■■  
■■  
Volume:  
** Tel Mode **  
■■  
Volume:  
Plug one end of the handset cord (it’s  
curled) into the P HONE1 jack on the left  
of your machine.  
3
** Tel Mode **  
Volume:  
Press MONITOR/CALL again to hang up.  
4
Plug the other end of the handset cord  
into the jack on the handset. If con-  
nected to a phone line, your fax machine  
is now “off-hook.”  
4
Note: The handset has a small “flash”  
button which you can press  
while holding the handset,  
putting the fax machine back  
“on-hook” until you can hang up  
the handset properly in step 5.  
1.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Place the telephone handset onto the handset cradle. The cradle will press the  
5
handset’s “flash” button, hanging up the handset.  
Attaching a second phone  
Want to attach a second phone (even a cordless model!) to your fax machine, so they  
can share the same phone jack? No problem.  
Before we go further, let’s explain the idea. You’re plugging the second phone’s  
phone line into your fax machine’s PHONE2 jack, not the wall phone jack. In such a  
setup, only your fax machine connects to the wall. The second phone receives phone  
signals through your fax machine.  
Now, let’s proceed…  
If your second phone is already plugged  
into a wall phone jack, disconnect it  
from that jack, at the jack. Hold onto  
the phone plug; you’ll need it in step 2.  
1
Note: Of course, if your second phone  
is a model which also requires  
AC power, as is true for the base  
of a cordless phone, don’t unplug  
it from its AC power jack!  
Using the plug mentioned in step 1,  
plug the phone cable from your second  
phone into the P HONE2 jack on the left  
2
side of your fax machine.  
For information on how to use a connected second telephone with your fax machine,  
see “Receiving faxes,” beginning on page 1.24.  
Installation complete!  
Now, see how our EasyStart feature will have  
you up and running within minutes.  
1.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
EasyStart  
EasyStart software is already installed on your Muratec fax machine. It guides you  
through the process of entering your machine’s settings.  
Entering initial settings  
Remember that the settings you make here can always be changed later. We’ll  
explain more in “Beyond the basics,” beginning on page 2.1.  
Im p or ta n t: If you press STOP during EasyStart, your fax machine returns to  
standby mode (its normal condition). But it will keep the settings you  
saved by pressing ENTER as described in these instructions.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
The LCD shows the current calendar/clock setting, with a cursor appearing  
under the first digit.  
I
,
ENTER.  
1
2
Getting started  
Determine the following before you go any further:  
Enter Time  
Th e typ e of d ia lin g your telephone system requires — Choose either tone or  
pulse (rotary) dialing.  
1
’01 01/01 00:00  
Th e n a m e a n d fa x n u m ber you w a n t to a p p ea r on you r fa xes —  
Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of  
text at the very top of the page. This text lists a name, called the Transmit  
Terminal Identifier (TTI), and a fax number. The TTI cannot be longer than 22  
characters.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the correct date and time, using a YYMMDD  
format for the date and 24-hour (“military”) format for the time. For instance,  
to set 8:30 PM on January 11, 2000, press 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 0 3 0, which results in:  
2
Enter Time  
’00 01/11 20:30  
Note: Your fax machine automatically inserts the spaces and date-slash. All  
Clearing stored settings  
you have to do is enter the digits.  
Before using EasyStart, clear your machine’s built-in user data memory. This  
To change a digit, press  
to move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it  
ensures the memory will hold only your settings.  
right. Then enter the correct digit.  
Im p or ta n t: After you use EasyStart, do not clear the memory again unless an  
authorized technician asks you to do so.  
To clear the machine’s memory:  
Press ENTER to save the clock setting and continue EasyStart.  
3
4
The LCD now asks if you want to set the calendar/clock to automatically  
recognize daylight saving time (DST).  
Press /P ROGRAM, *, 2. The LCD now asks if you want to clear the memory:  
1
Daylight Saving:Off  
Program/Enter  
Clear User Settings  
Check Program/Enter  
When the setting is On, your machine automatically recognizes DST at 2 AM on  
the appropriate switchover Sundays each year.  
When the setting is Off, no automatic change will occur.  
Note: If you don’t want to clear the memory, just press /P ROGRAM.  
If you do want to clear the memory, press ENTER.  
2
1.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, use the one-touch keys.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
5
In “Beyond the Basics,” we’ll show you how to use the CODE function to enter  
even more characters (see page 2.2).  
Here, we’ve changed the setting to On:  
Daylight Saving:On  
Program/Enter  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change just one character in the name, press  
to move left, or  
/P ROGRAM, to move right. Press CANCEL to erase the character. Then  
re-enter the character correctly.  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
6
7
The LCD now asks you to enter your fax number as you want it to appear on  
other fax machines’ displays or printouts. The fax industry term for this  
number is Subscriber ID.  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
11  
12  
The LCD now asks you to enter the type of dialing needed for the fax machine,  
either tone or pulse:  
Your Fax Number  
Phone Type :Tone  
Program/Enter  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number. To insert a dash, as shown  
here, press DIALING OP TIONS once. The number may contain up to 20  
characters (numbers and dashes).  
8
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
13  
Here, we’ve changed the setting to Pulse mode:  
Your Fax Number  
972-555-5525  
Phone Type :Pulse  
Program/Enter  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
14  
15  
To change just one number, press  
to move left, or /P ROGRAM to  
move right. Press CANCEL to erase the number. Then re-enter the fax  
number correctly.  
The LCD now shows the machine’s current reception mode.  
Fax Ready  
Press ENTER to save the number.  
Program/Enter  
9
10  
The LCD now asks you to enter the name you want to appear at the top of  
faxes you send. The name may be up to 22 characters in length.  
For now, press  
or /P ROGRAM until the setting Fax Ready appears. (This  
16  
17  
setting can always be changed. We’ll discuss reception modes further on pages  
1.24–1.27.)  
Use the one-touch keys to enter letters and other non-numeric characters.  
Press ENTER to save the setting. Your machine will return to standby mode.  
Your Name ;Upper  
_
The word “Upper” means the machine will enter only upper-case letters. If  
Ea sySta r t is com p lete!  
you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
To type a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display changes to:  
Your Name ;Lower  
_
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
R
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.  
1.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Sending faxes  
Resolution, grayscale and contrast  
Guidelines  
Reviewing resolution and grayscale:  
Page sizes  
•
•
•
•
Nor m a l resolution (“NORM” on the control panel) is suitable for most typed  
documents and simple drawings.  
While you’ll probably send letter- and legal-sized documents most of the time, it’s  
possible to fax a piece of paper as small as a notepad sheet or one nearly three feet  
long.  
Fin e resolution (“FINE” on the control panel) is ideal for maps, moderately compli-  
cated drawings, floorplans or handwritten documents.  
The acceptable dimensions (width × length) are:  
Au tom a tic d ocu m en t feed er (ADF  
SINGLE-SHEET  
Su per fin e resolution (“S-FINE” on the control panel, “S Fine” on the LCD)  
reproduces the detail of extremely complicated drawings or line art.  
)
MULTIPLE-SHEET  
Gr a ysca le mode (“HALFTONE” on the control panel; “Gray” on the LCD) captures  
shades in photos and drawings.  
Maximum:12.0″ × 35.4″  
Maximum:11.7″ × 16.5″  
Minimum: 4.7″ × 3.9″  
Minimum: 5.8″ × 4.1″  
Note: If you send a fax in superfine, certain fax models (especially older, non-  
Muratec models) receive it only in fine mode. However, you can send a fax in  
grayscale mode to virtually any fax machine currently in use.  
F la tbed sca n n er (F BS)  
Maximum:10.1″ × 14.3″  
HALFTONE  
To change the resolution setting, press RESOLUTION repeatedly. As  
noted above, if neither the FINE, S-FINE nor HALFTONE LED (light-  
Things not to put in your fax  
S-FINE  
To avoid paper jams and damage to your machine, d on ’t in ser t:  
emitting diode; in this case, a small green light) is glowing, your fax  
FINE  
is set for normal resolution. Otherwise, a glowing LED indicates the  
fax is using the setting named by that LED. For example, in the  
drawing (left), the machine is set for FINE resolution.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Folded, curled, torn, wrinkled or very thin pages  
Documents with staples, glue, tape, paper clips or still-wet correction fluid  
“Sticky notes” (or documents with “sticky notes” attached)  
Cardboard, newspaper or fabric  
RESOLUTION  
Contrast  
Pages with duplicating carbon on either side  
Setting the contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive lightness or dark-  
ness, as the case may be, of document pages you are sending or copying.  
Credit cards or any small, thick items  
To change the contrast setting:  
Press CONTRAST on the control panel. The display, or LCD (liquid crystal dis-  
play), indicates the current contrast setting.  
1
To adjust the contrast setting, press  
To light up an overly dark document, press  
To darken an overly weak document, press  
,
or CONTRAST.  
2
.
.
1.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Note: To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings, just remember —  
Using memory transmission  
“Light lightens” and “Dark darkens” — to keep it straight.  
Your fax machine has a great memory! Take advantage of it, and you could:  
Entering a pause character when dialing  
Some long-distance systems require dialing pauses, and pauses can also be useful  
when you’re dialing through special telephone exchanges.  
Sa ve Tim e. By using your fax machine’s memory, you won’t have to wait for your  
machine while it completes the transmission. Simply scan your document into your  
fax machine’s memory, and you can walk away with your original in hand.  
Sa ve Mon ey. If you’re transmitting to another memory-equipped fax machine, your  
machine will send the document directly into the other machine’s memory and hang  
up. (The receiving machine then prints out your message from its memory after the  
call has ended.) This cuts your actual on-line time to a minimum.  
To insert a pause character, just press REDIAL/PAUSE after you’ve dialed at least one  
other character. -/(the pause character) will appear on the display.  
Each pause entered lasts for a factory-set two seconds (see “Changing the pause  
length,” below, for instructions to change this setting).  
For example, if the pause is at the factory setting, pressing 9, REDIAL/PAUSE,  
19725552009 dials 9 [2-second pause] 1 9 7 2 5 5 5 2 0 0 9.  
Sa ve Even Mor e Mon ey. Set up a delayed command (see pages 2.17–2.19) to send  
your document after hours, and you can save more money, because the line charges  
will be cheaper.  
Im p or ta n t: Each pause uses two of the characters you’re allowed in a number.  
You can set your fax to transmit from memory as the default.  
Note: Whether you decide to send your documents from memory or manually, you  
can override that choice one transmission at a time by pressing  
MEMORY TRANSMIT before you send your document. After completing the  
communication, your fax will return to the default setting.  
Changing the pause length  
The pause is set by the factory to last two seconds, but you can set it to last as long  
as ten seconds if necessary. To change the pause length:  
Note: Some documents use up memory more quickly than others. They include  
documents with many pages and those with many dark areas. When the  
machine’s memory is full, it can transmit only through the document feeder.  
Press P ROGRAM, , 0, 4, ENTER.  
J
1
Set Dialing Pause  
Time  
(02-10):02  
Note: When you use the flatbed scanner, the machine always uses memory trans-  
mission.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want for the dialing pause.  
Here, we’ve chosen nine seconds.  
2
To make memory transmission the default:  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 3, ENTER.  
1
Set Dialing Pause  
Time  
(02-10):09  
Memory Tx  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Note: The length setting requires two digits. Always enter a leading zero for  
lengths less than 10 seconds.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
2
In this example, we’ve chosen Off.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
Memory Tx  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Potential problems with call-waiting and voice mail  
Telephone call-waiting signals can stop fax transmission and reception. And any  
service — such as voice mail — which may intercept your calls can keep your fax  
machine from receiving fax calls.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light glows, memory transmission is on.  
If the MEMORY TRANSMIT light doesn’t glow, memory transmission is off.  
3
If you use only one line for both phone and fax, consult your telephone company to  
see how you can temporarily disable call-waiting or voice mail while using the fax  
machine.  
1.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Sending a fax using the ADF  
Press START.  
7
8
By pressing START, you’ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your  
machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.  
This command number appears on the first line of the LCD for a few seconds:  
== Command:01 ==  
You’ll need to know this command number if you later wish to cancel the  
transmission or to print a stored document (see pages 1.23).  
Now, everything is up to the machines — yours and the one you’re dialing.  
•
If the fax has been set for Quick Memory transmit, your machine scans the  
first page of your document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it  
makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from memory  
while at the same time scanning the remaining pages of your document  
into memory. (To set Quick Memory transmission, see pages 2.31.)  
If the machine is already in Fax mode, skip to step 2.  
If the machine is in Copy mode, press COP Y/F AX to change to Fax mode.  
1
Adjust the document guides — by sliding either of them to the left or right —  
to fit the page(s) you’ll be faxing. Your fax machine’s automatic document  
feeder will hold up to 50 pages of letter-sized paper, 25 pages of legal-sized  
2
•
•
If the fax has been set for the normal memory transmit, your fax scans the  
entire document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it makes con-  
tact, your machine transmits the entire stored document from memory.  
paper or 15 pages of 11″ × 17″ (ledger)-sized paper.  
Insert the document fa ce u p . When a document is in the feeder, the LCD  
shows the current scanning width (see “A4, B4, A3” in the Glossary beginning  
on page 3.17) and the amount of memory available:  
3
If the fax is set for non-memory transmission, your machine simply dials  
the other fax. When it makes contact, your machine feeds the document  
through, scanning and transmitting it as it goes.  
Document Ready  
A4  
Mem100%  
Note: The more “stuff” (called black coverage) your machine “sees” on a  
page, the more slowly the page feeds through as the fax scans it. And  
even if the page is relatively clean, sending it in grayscale mode or at  
certain resolutions makes your machine “see” more “stuff.”  
The same is true if you set the contrast to Dark.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.  
Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.  
4
Adjust memory transmission if necessary.  
Press MEMORY TRANSMIT to toggle memory transmission on and off.  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-  
ment, press the STOP key.  
5
6
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review  
Commands function. See “Review Commands, an introduction”  
page 1.23.  
Enter the fax number.  
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone  
call. (Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for  
long-distance.)  
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:  
9
Press Start  
919725552009_  
972-555-2009  
** Complete **  
Im p or ta n t: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on  
the top line of the display depends on information stored in the  
remote fax. The line may even be blank.  
Note: If the call fails, see “Redialing,” page 1.22.  
1.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Sending a fax using the FBS  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.  
6
7
Press CONTRAST, then press  
or  
to change the contrast.  
Enter the fax number.  
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone  
call. (Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for  
long-distance.)  
Press Start  
919725552009_  
Press START.  
8
By pressing START, you’ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your  
machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.  
This command number appears on the first line of the LCD for a few seconds:  
If the machine is already in Fax mode, skip to step 2.  
If the machine is in Copy mode, press COP Y/F AX to change to Fax mode.  
1
2
== Command:01 ==  
If there isn’t a document in the feeder, skip to step 3.  
If there’s a document in the feeder, remove it.  
You’ll need this command number to cancel the transmission or to print a  
stored document (see pages 1.23).  
Open the book-cover.  
3
4
Then your machine will scan the document into the memory.  
While your machine scans the document, the LCD will show:  
Place the document fa ce d ow n on the FBS and align it with the document  
scale on the right, then gently close the book-cover.  
Make sure the document is set beyond the right front corner.  
919725552009  
Ltr NextDoc Mem100%  
Im p or ta n t: Gently close the book-cover so that you don’t catch your hands,  
possibly injuring them.  
When a thick document, such as a book, is on the FBS, d o n ot  
pr ess str on gly from the top of the book-cover. This may break  
the contact glass and cause an injury.  
When the scanning is done, the LCD will show:  
9
→
Start Scan Next  
→
Tx Start Start  
Press BOOK DOC SIZE to select the document size, letter (displayed as Ltr),  
legal (Legl), half-letter (HLtr) or B4. (Half-letter is 8.5″ wide × 5.5″ tall; B4,  
widely used internationally, is 10.1″ × 14.3″.)  
5
If you want to send more pages, proceed to step 10.  
Otherwise, press START to start the transmission, and skip to step 11.  
Place the next page, then press NEXT to start scanning.  
10  
Note: If necessary, select the document size (see step 5).  
To send any more pages, repeat steps 9-10.  
Otherwise, press START to start the transmission, and skip to step 11.  
1.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Sending a fax using monitor/call or a handset  
You also can fax a document using either the monitor speaker or the optional  
handset to dial the call.  
Now, everything is up to the machines — yours and the one you’re dialing.  
When it makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from  
memory.  
11  
12  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-  
ment, press the STOP key.  
Note: Faxing this way disables “V.34” mode and sends the fax in normal ITU-T  
Group 3 fashion. This may slow transmission for this document. See page  
3.20 for more information.  
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review  
Commands function. See “Review Commands, an introduction”  
page 1.23.  
Insert the document to the ADF.  
1
2
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.  
Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.  
972-555-2009  
** Complete **  
Obtain a dial tone, either by:  
3
Im p or ta n t: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on  
the top line of the display depends on information stored in the  
remote fax. The line may even be blank.  
•
Pressing MONITOR/CALL  
… or …  
•
Lifting the optional handset.  
Note: If the call fails, see “Redialing,” page 1.22.  
In either case, the LCD shows:  
** Tel Mode **  
_
Enter the fax number by using the numeric keypad.  
Also, enter access codes with the number, just as for a regular phone call.  
4
5
Note: For information on one-touch and speed-dial numbers, see 2.8–2.14.  
** Tel Mode **  
919725552009_  
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.  
Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that  
person that you’re trying to send a fax. When you hear fax tones,  
press START.  
If you’re using an optional handset, hang up after pressing START.  
6
7
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:  
972-555-2009  
** Complete **  
Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press  
MONITOR/CALL to hang up. Or if you’ve pressed START to begin the fax  
transmission, press STOP to end it.  
Also see “Redialing manually,” next page, if the call fails.  
1.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Changing redial settings  
It’s up to you how many times the fax redials a number and how long it waits  
between redials (that length of time between calls is the redial interval). To program  
the redial settings:  
Redialing  
If your fax call fails, your machine automatically redials it. In this Auto Redial  
mode, your fax automatically redials the number every few minutes (see “Changing  
redial settings,” right column) until one of the following happens:  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 6, ENTER.  
J
•
•
It reaches the remote fax machine.  
1
It has attempted the number of redials programmed and has still not connected  
(see “Changing redial settings,” right column).  
Set # Of Redials  
#
(02-15):02  
While in the Auto Redial mode, the machine can continue to receive faxes and can  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of redials you want. Choose  
from 2 to 15 redials. In this example, we’ve entered 03.  
make as many as 99 fax transmissions.  
2
Note: If you used either the speaker or a handset to dial the call, you must redial  
manually (see below).  
Set # Of Redials  
#
(02-15):03  
Note: If the last redial attempt fails, your machine may print (and/or display) error  
messages. For more information, see pages 3.11.  
Im p or ta n t: Enter a leading zero when entering a quantity less than 10.  
Redialing manually  
You can always redial calls manually. And you must redial manually if you used  
either the monitor speaker or an optional handset to dial the failed call.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
4
The LCD now shows:  
Set Redial Interval  
To redial a fax call manually without using the monitor speaker or an optional  
handset:  
Inter.  
(1-5):1  
Make sure the document is in the feeder and that the resolution and  
contrast are set.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want between redial  
attempts. Choose from 1 to 5 minutes. In this example, we’ve chosen 4.  
1
5
6
Press REDIAL/PAUSE, START.  
2
Set Redial Interval  
Inter.  
(1-5):4  
To redial a fax call manually with the monitor speaker or an optional handset:  
Make sure the document is in the feeder and that the resolution and  
contrast are set.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
1
Press MONITOR/CALL or lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.  
2
3
4
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.  
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.  
Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that  
person you’re sending a fax. When you hear fax tones, press START.  
To redial a voice call manually using the optional handset:  
Lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.  
1
2
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. When the other person answers, use the optional  
handset to speak to that person.  
1.22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Review Commands, an introduction  
Your fax machine can store many “jobs” in its memory. And it keeps track of each one  
by assigning it a command number, like “C01.”  
Delayed commands, redial attempts and current fax transmissions are all stored in  
your fax machine’s memory and given a command number.  
The Review Commands function gives you the power to check on each job (or  
command) in your machine’s memory. It also lets you cancel a command if you  
decide not to send the document.  
To cancel a command:  
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.  
The LCD shows the first command, indicated by its command number and the  
phone number it will dial. If a command is in progress, that will be the first  
command the LCD shows:  
1
C01:5552009  
Program/Cancel  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the command you want to cancel appears.  
2
3
Press CANCEL. The LCD shows:  
C01:5552009  
Check Program/Cancel  
If you want to cancel this command, press CANCEL again.  
4
5
The LCD now shows the next command.  
If you want to cancel it, too, go back to step 4.  
If you don’t want to cancel this command but do want to review other  
commands, press /P ROGRAM until the command you want appears. Then go  
back to step 4.  
If you want to stop reviewing the stored commands, press STOP to return the  
machine to standby mode.  
For more information on the Review Commands function, see page 2.18.  
1.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Receiving faxes  
Answering calls manually  
In any reception mode, you can always answer calls manually if you have an  
optional handset installed. Just pick it up, as you would if using a normal phone.  
Tel Ready mode  
Use it if:  
• You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls  
and  
• On that line, you’re using at least one other phone which is not  
connected to your fax machine  
or  
If you hear someone speaking to you, use your  
optional handset to speak back.  
• You have an optional handset installed on your fax machine  
In th is m od e: Your fax machine never answers calls automatically. You must  
answer each call as described in “Answering calls manually” (this  
page, left column).  
If you hear fax tones (“beep — beep — beep”),  
press START and hang up the optional handset.  
The fax machine will begin receiving a fax.  
To select Tel Ready:  
Press COP Y/F AX to change to the fax mode, if the machine isn’t the fax mode.  
1
2
Note: Receiving this way disables “V.34” mode  
so that the machine receives the fax in  
normal ITU-T Group 3 fashion. (See  
page 3.20.)  
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER six times. The LCD shows your  
current default reception mode:  
Fax Ready  
Program/Enter  
Note: Don’t try to answer a call by pressing MONITOR/CALL. The monitor function  
is for dialing only.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:  
3
4
Tel Ready  
Program/Enter  
Answering fax calls using another phone, not the fax machine  
If you have one phone line ringing to several phones in your office and you have an  
optional handset attached to your fax, there’s no need to run to the fax machine to  
answer every call. If you happen to answer a fax call while you’re at another  
extension, put the handset down, but don’t hang up. Walk to the fax machine and  
pick up the optional handset. Then press START.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
In the Tel ready mode, the AUTO ANSWER light is not lit.  
After you press START, hang up both the fax machine’s handset and the second  
telephone’s handset. Because remote fax machines will wait several seconds to hear  
reception tones from your unit, you have about 30 seconds to walk to your fax, pick  
up the handset, and press START.  
Reception modes  
Your fax machine has five different reception modes — Tel Ready, Fax Ready,  
Fax/ Tel Ready, Tel/ Fax Ready and Ans/ Fax Ready. We’ll explain each of these in  
this section.  
1.24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Fax Ready mode  
Fax/Tel Ready mode  
The Fax/Tel Ready mode is a combination of the Fax Ready and Tel Ready modes.  
Use it if:  
Your fax machine uses its own phone line and doesn’t share it with a  
phone or an answering machine.  
Use it if:  
An optional handset is installed on your fax machine  
and  
In th is m od e: Your fax machine answers each call and attempts to receive a fax.  
You’re using the machine as both a fax machine and a telephone  
To select Fax Ready:  
In th is m od e: Your fax machine answers each call without ringing. If you receive a  
voice call, it alerts you with a special ring.  
To select Fax/Tel Ready:  
Press COP Y/F AX to change to the fax mode, if the machine isn’t the fax mode.  
1
2
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER six times. The LCD shows your  
current default reception mode:  
Press COP Y/F AX to change to the fax mode, if the machine isn’t the fax mode.  
1
2
Fax Ready  
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER six times. The LCD shows your  
current default reception mode:  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:  
Fax Ready  
3
Program/Enter  
Fax Ready  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:  
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Fax/Tel Ready  
Program/Enter  
4
5
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
4
5
In the Fax ready mode, the AUTO ANSWER light is lit.  
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.  
Now your fax machine receives faxes silently but also alerts you when a regular  
voice call comes in. (Your fax machine also beeps once at the end of each reception.)  
If a voice call comes in, your fax machine detects it and sounds a special ring. If you  
hear it, answer using your optional handset.  
Note: This Fax/Tel Ready mode won’t turn off ringers on other telephones in your  
house or office. Other phones won’t distinguish between fax and voice calls.  
In the Fax/Tel ready mode, the AUTO ANSWER light is lit.  
1.25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Tel/Fax Ready mode  
Ans/Fax Ready mode  
The Tel/Fax Ready mode is a combination of the Tel Ready and Fax Ready modes.  
Use it if:  
You’re using an answering machine that’s connected directly to your  
fax machine.  
Use it if:  
An optional handset is installed on your fax machine  
and  
In th is m od e: An answering machine connected to your fax machine answers each  
call. If a voice call comes in, the answering machine begins to record  
the incoming message. If your fax machine hears a fax tone, it  
begins receiving the fax message.  
You’re using the machine as both a telephone and a fax machine  
In th is m od e: Your fax machine rings the number of times you’ve identified in the  
user settings. If you don’t use the optional handset to answer the  
call, your fax machine answers the call. If a caller sends a fax, your  
machine begins receiving it. If a voice call comes in, your machine  
detects it and sounds a special ring, telling you to answer using the  
optional handset.  
To select Ans/Fax Ready:  
Press COP Y/F AX to change to the fax mode, if the machine isn’t the fax mode.  
1
2
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER six times. The LCD shows your  
current default reception mode:  
To select Tel/Fax Ready:  
Press COP Y/F AX to change to the fax mode, if the machine isn’t the fax mode.  
1
2
Fax Ready  
Program/Enter  
Press /P ROGRAM, I, and then press ENTER six times. The LCD shows your  
current default reception mode:  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:  
3
Fax Ready  
Ans/Fax Ready  
Program/Enter  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the LCD shows:  
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
4
5
Tel/Fax Ready  
Program/Enter  
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
4
5
In the Ans/Fax ready mode, the AUTO ANSWER light is lit.  
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.  
In the Tel/Fax ready mode, the AUTO ANSWER light is lit.  
1.26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Using an answering machine with your fax machine  
To connect your answering machine to your fax machine:  
If the paper runs out  
Getting the word from your machine  
When your fax machine runs out of paper, the machine beeps, the REP LACE PAP ER  
light glows and the LCD indicates which source has run out of paper, either the  
cassette or the multipurpose tray.  
Set the fax machine for Ans/Fax Ready, as described on page 1.26.  
1
2
Set your answering machine to answer calls after no more than two rings.  
(See the answering machine’s instructions if necessary.)  
In this example, the cassette is empty:  
Create a new outgoing message on your answering machine.  
Here’s a suggested message:  
3
Fax Ready  
Check Rx Paper  
Hello! You’ve reached [your name or telephone number]. To leave a voice  
message, please wait for the beep. To send a fa x, press START on your fax  
machine. Thanks for calling!  
Your fax machine cannot print fax messages or copies without paper. But it can still  
receive documents into its memory, as described in the section below.  
Im p or ta n t: Your answering machine’s outgoing message must be no longer  
than 10 seconds.  
Receiving when out of paper  
If your machine runs out of paper, it stores up to 100 fax receptions in its memory.  
This is called out-of-paper reception. Once you refill the paper supply, the fax  
machine prints the stored messages automatically.  
Detection of “silent” fax machines  
Some older fax machines don’t send fax tones when transmitting, which can cause  
problems when using an answering machine with your fax.  
Note: The number of pages (not receptions) your fax machine can store for  
But your fax machine can accommodate these “silent” machines without disrupting  
your answering machine operation. For more information, call your authorized  
Muratec dealer.  
out-of-paper reception will vary. It depends on:  
•
•
•
Your machine’s memory capacity  
Types of documents being sent to your machine  
Resolution of documents being sent to your machine  
(See Specifications, page AI.1.)  
1.27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Making copies  
Your fax machine also doubles as a convenience copier.  
Paper source and paper size  
If you wish to select the paper supply source manually, press PAP ER SIZE? repeat-  
edly until your desired paper source appears:  
To make copies with your fax machine, press COP Y/F AX to change to  
the Copy mode.  
When the machine is in the Copy ready mode, the LCD will show:  
Number of copies  
You may also choose from either the standard paper cassette (C1) or the Multi  
paper tray (T). If your machine also has either or both of the two optional cassettes,  
you may also choose (C2) or (C3). To use the Multi paper tray, press ENTER while the  
display shows:  
Copy reduction and enlargement rate  
Recording paper size  
Paper source  
C1:First paper cassette  
C2:Second paper cassette (Option)  
C3:Third paper cassette (Option)  
T :Muliti paper tray  
Then, press PAP ER SIZE? to set paper size. This is the size of the paper in either the  
paper cassette (or cassettes, if you have one or both of the optional cassettes) or  
Multi paper tray. You can set letter- or legal-sized paper in the paper cassette(s),  
and letter-, legal- or half-letter-sized paper in the Multi paper tray. When you set  
transparency film on the multi paper tray, please select “OHP” mode.  
Contrast level  
Making copy settings  
Number of pages  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of copies for the document.  
Copy reduction or enlargement rate  
Your fax machine can make enlarged and reduced copies. For more information, see  
“Setting of enlargement or reduction for copying,” page 1.31.  
Note: The copy enlargement and reduction rate setting affects only copying. It  
Contrast level  
See “Contrast” (pages 1.17–1.18) for more information.  
doesn’t affect the fax reception reduction rate (see pages 2.3–2.3).  
1.28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of copies for each page  
in the document. You may choose one to 99 copies. Here, we’ve entered “3” to  
choose a setting of three copies.  
Sort copy  
7
Press SORT COP Y to toggle (switch on or off) sorting copy if necessary. The initial set-  
ting is Off.  
How to copy  
Press SORT COP Y once or twice to “toggle” (switch on or off) the sorting of  
copies, as desired.  
8
9
Copying using the ADF  
Press START to begin the copying process.  
Note: To stop the copying before it is through, press STOP  
.
Note: Thanks to your machine’s QuardAccess® feature (see page 2.37 for more),  
copying doesn’t keep you incommunicado while in progress: you can start a  
fax or voice call and even receive a voice call during copying.  
When using the FBS  
If necessary, press COP Y/F AX to change to Copy mode.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
1
Prepare the document just as you would to send a fax.  
2
Note: There are certain types of documents you never should insert into  
your fax machine. (You might wish to review “Things NOT to put in  
your fax,” page 1.17.)  
Insert your document fa ce u p . Adjust the document guides for a correct fit.  
When the document is correctly inserted, you’ll hear a short beep.  
3
Note: Make sure that all the pages are the same size and thickness.  
Do n ot attempt to feed documents of different size and thickness in  
the same stack.  
If necessary, press COP Y/F AX to change to Copy mode.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
1
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
4
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.  
Open the book-cover, place your document face down on the FBS and align it  
with the scale on the right.  
2
Press CONTRAST, then press  
or  
to change the contrast.  
Set the reduction rate, if you want. (See “Setting of enlargement or reduction  
for copying,” page 1.31.)  
Note: Be sure that you place the original document on the FBS in the same  
orientation as the paper in the paper source (which you’ll select in  
step 4).  
5
6
If you want to make only one copy of each page of the document, skip to step  
9. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.  
Gently close the book-cover.  
3
4
Press PAP ER SIZE? to select recording paper (see page 1.28).  
1.29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.  
Press CONTRAST, then press or to change the contrast.  
5
Place a sheet of printout  
paper on the Multi paper  
tray. Then align the paper  
guides to the sheet’s edges  
and insert the sheet until  
it comes to a stop.  
2
Set the reduction or enlargement rate, if you want. (See “Setting of enlarge-  
ment or reduction for copying,” page 1.31.)  
6
7
8
If you want to make only one copy of each page of the document, skip to step  
10. Otherwise, proceed to step 8.  
Note: Place the original  
document in the  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of copies for each page  
in the document. You may choose one to 99 copies. Here, we’ve entered “3” to  
choose a setting of three copies.  
same orientation  
as the paper in the  
paper source  
(which you’ll select  
in step 5, below).  
•
•
If you are going to make more than one copy, you should insert the print-  
out paper only one page at a time.  
Press SORT COP Y once or twice to “Toggle” (switch on or off) the sorting of  
copies, as desired.  
9
You may use letter-, legal- or half-letter sized paper. (Half-letter is 8.5″  
Press START to begin the copying process.  
wide × 5.5″ tall.)  
10  
Press PAP ER SIZE? repeatedly until the following display appears:  
Note: To stop the copying before it is through, press STOP  
.
3
Note: Thanks to your machine’s QuadAccess® feature (see page 2.37 for more),  
copying doesn’t keep you incommunicado while in progress: you can start a  
fax or voice call and even receive a voice call during copying.  
Press ENTER.  
4
5
Using the Multi paper tray  
When you need to use a size of paper not currently loaded in your machine’s paper  
cassette(s), or when you want to use a special type of paper (such as transparency  
film), use the Multi paper tray.  
Then, if necessary, press PAP ER SIZE? again to select a same size of recording  
paper you placed document on the ADF or FBS. You can select either letter-,  
legal- or half-letter-sized paper.  
Im p or ta n t: If loading transparency (OHP) film into the multi paper tray, be sure  
that the sheet is designed for laser printers and not for copiers. Also,  
be sure that the film does not have a paper backing and/or a leading  
strip. If it does, remove the paper backing and/or strip before insert-  
ing. Only film should go in, not film with any backing or strip.  
Either insert the document in the ADF or place it on the F BS.  
1
Note: When you use transparency film, please select “OHP” mode.  
You can use letter-sized transparency film.  
If necessary, select desired resolution, contrast, reduction/enlargement rate.  
(See “Setting of enlargement or reduction for copying,” next page.)  
6
7
Press START to begin the copying process.  
1.30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting of enlargement or reduction for copying  
Copy protection  
Your fax machine is capable of enlargement and reduction when copying.  
With such a versatile copier built right into your fax machine, you might want to  
make sure it doesn’t become too tempting to some people whose unauthorized copy-  
ing could deplete your machine’s supplies more rapidly. So, to limit the use of your  
fax machine to only sending and receiving faxes — in other words, to activate copy  
protection:  
Note: The copy enlargement and reduction rate setting is available only for copy-  
ing, not for faxing.  
Im p or ta n t: Copy enlargement is available only for copying using the FBS; it is not  
available for copying using the ADF.  
To change the reduction or enlargement rate for copying, either select a preset rate  
or directly enter a rate.  
If the machine is in Fax mode, skip to step 2.  
Otherwise, press COP Y/F AX to change to Fax mode.  
1
Press P ROGRAM, , 0, 3, ENTER.  
J
2
Selecting a preset rate  
Either . . .  
Copy Protect :Off  
Program/Enter  
•
Press ENLARGE to select one of the following fixed enlargement rates.  
200%  
Press P ROGRAM to turn on copy protection.  
3
129% : Half-letter (5.5″ × 8.5″) → Letter (8.5″ × 11″)  
100%  
Copy Protect :On  
Program/Enter  
. . . or . . .  
Press REDUCE to select one of the following fixed reduction rates.  
•
Press ENTER  
4
78%: Legal → Letter  
64%: Ledger (11″ × 17″) → Letter (8.5″ × 11″)  
Copy Protect  
** Complete **  
Directly entering a rate  
Using the numeric keypad, directly enter the reduction or enlargement rate by  
doing one of the following.  
While this setting is active, whenever someone tries to change the machine to Copy  
mode, the machine will sound a brief alarm tone and display:  
Either . . .  
Fax Ready  
Copy Off  
Press #.  
1
Im p or ta n t: To turn off copy protection off so that you can again use the machine’s  
copying function, repeat steps 2-4, above (step 1 is unnecessary since  
the machine will be in Fax mode) except that, in step 3, you press  
P ROGRAM so that the display shows:  
Enter your desired rate using the numeric keypad. You can set any rate from  
50% reduction through 200% enlargement.  
2
Press # again.  
3
Copy Protect :Off  
Program/Enter  
. . . or . . .  
Press  
or  
to adjust the rate, at 1% intervals, from/including 50% reduction  
through 200% enlargement.  
1.31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Using your fax machine as a phone  
Your fax machine can also be used as a phone, if you have an optional handset  
installed. The following is a brief look at the machine’s telephone features.  
EasyDial directory dialing  
The EasyDial directory feature is available for regular phone calls as well as fax calls.  
Review the EasyDial instructions on page 2.15 for more information.  
Redial  
Press REDIAL/PAUSE to redial the last number dialed on your machine.  
Checking the fax reception mode  
While using an optional handset for your call, if you press CLEAR ALL, the LCD shows  
the current fax reception mode. Press CLEAR ALL again to return to the TEL mode.  
Dialing with the monitor speaker  
Because your machine has a monitor speaker, you can dial without picking up the  
handset. For hands-free dialing:  
Dialing in the event of a power failure  
Your fax machine can receive telephone calls even in the event of a power failure if  
Press MONITOR/CALL. You’ll hear a dial tone (unless you have set your speaker  
an optional handset is attached. But it cannot send or receive a fax document.  
1
volume to Off; see page 1.13), and the LCD shows:  
** Tel Mode **  
_
Dial the number you want. Use either the numeric keypad, a one-touch key or  
a speed-dial number to dial.  
2
Note: Remember, your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone. If a  
person answers the call, pick up the handset to speak.  
Note: If the call fails, press MONITOR/CALL to hang up.  
1.32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
This page intentionally blank.  
1.33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
We’ve covered  
the “musts.”  
Now, let’s explore  
the goodies.  
Entering settings for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16  
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20  
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24  
F-Code communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38  
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48  
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Entering settings for your fax machine  
The EasyStart feature guided you through the “just-gotta” settings on your machine.  
In the next few pages, we’ll cover additional settings.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,  
4
5
we’ve chosen light contrast.  
Contrast :Light  
Program/Enter  
Scan settings  
Four different settings tell your machine how to scan documents. The initial factory  
settings are probably right for most applications, so try using them before changing  
any of these settings:  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks you to select a scanning width:  
Scan Width  
:A3  
Program/Enter  
•
•
•
P r im a r y r esolu tion m od e — Sets the resolution for your documents. Choose  
either normal, fine, superfine (“S Fine” on the LCD) or grayscale mode (“Gray”).  
For most uses, “A4” is the proper setting. It scans the central 8.2″ of each page.  
But for documents with an unusual width, you may want to use the “B4” and  
“A3” settings, which scans the central 9.9″ and 11.6″ of each page. (See “A4, B4,  
A3” in the Glossary on page 3.17.)  
P r im a r y con tr a st m od e — Sets how light or dark you want faxed documents  
to be when they arrive at their destinations.  
Sca n n in g w id th — Sets how wide an area your machine scans for each page.  
Note: The primary settings you choose effect your fax activity only.  
To set these modes:  
Press  
we’ve chosen “A4”.  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,  
6
7
Scan Width  
:A4  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a resolution:  
1
2
Program/Enter  
Primary  
:Normal  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,  
By following the steps above, you’ve set your defaults for scanning. Before sending  
documents, you can “override” these default scan settings for that transmission.  
we’ve chosen fine resolution.  
Primary  
:Fine  
To override the default resolution and contrast settings before sending a document:  
Program/Enter  
•
•
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.  
Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks you to select a contrast setting:  
3
Once your document is transmitted, your machine returns to its default settings.  
Contrast :Normal  
Program/Enter  
2.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Using CODE to enter characters  
Some settings give you a chance to enter an identifying name (see EasyStart, page  
Print settings  
You can set three parameters for printing received fax messages:  
1.15–1.16). You can do this with the one-touch key, and you can also use the CODE  
key.  
•
•
•
Print reduction rate  
Reduction margin  
Half-page reception  
To use the CODE key to enter characters:  
When the machine prompts you to enter a name, press CODE. The display  
changes to:  
You set all three in the same procedure, discussed on page 2.3. Following is a short  
explanation for each:  
1
Your Name ;Code  
_
Print reduction rate  
Print reduction lets you set the machine to reduce large incoming documents to a  
size which fits on the paper in your machine. This setting doesn’t affect copies you  
may make with your machine. Fortunately, however, it also has copy reduction (see  
“Setting of enlargement and reduction for copying” on page 1.31).  
Find the character you want to enter in the chart below.  
2
First keypress  
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
→
←
A
Ç
B
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
C
D
↑
↓
á
E
α
F
p
q
θ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
Below are the options for both the print reduction and copy reduction settings:  
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
˚
β
ε
µ
σ
ρ
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
í
Settin g  
Au to  
Wh a t it d oes  
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
a
Ω
ü
Σ
π
x
`
.
Automatically reduces printouts at variable rates down to a  
minimum of 50%. Tries to reduce printout to fit on one sheet of  
your selected paper size. If it can’t, prints the image at 100% size  
on two or more pages.  
G
H
I
ÿ
Ö
\
″
o
¿
J
Ü
j
Does not reduce document. (Due to the sender’s TTI, this may print  
two pages when receiving a one-page fax document. See 97%, below.)  
100%  
97%  
K
L
M
N
O
C
D
E
F
¥
]
^
_
î
ì
Ä
Å
£
¥
¡
-
.
/
÷
Reduces an original so that the final printout of a one-page-  
document (if the original isn’t larger than the paper in your  
machine) will only be one page long, even with the TTI.  
P
t
n
«
»
ƒ
˚
The legends in the black border indicate which key you press, and in which  
order, to get a given character. For example, to get a back-slash (\ ) character,  
you’d press C, 8. (The blank areas for 2, 0 and C, 0 indicate spaces.)  
91%  
81%  
Reduces documents slightly more.  
Reduces documents even more. Helpful for some international  
stationery sizes, as well as special applications.  
To enter each character, press the key combination listed on the chart.  
3
4
Turns legal-sized originals into letter-sized printed copies.  
75%  
Im p or ta n t: Remember, there are three ways to enter characters:  
En ter  
Numbers  
Letters/characters  
Letters/characters/numbers  
Usin g  
Numeric keypad  
One-touch keys  
For best results …  
Whenever possible, loa d th e cor r ect size of p a p er befor e r eceivin g a  
fa x (or m a k in g a cop y) of th a t size. Although it’s convenient, the reduc-  
tion feature can’t be used for every situation.  
CODE chart for key combinations  
Note: If you want to erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
If you want to change just one character in the name, press  
the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase  
the character. Then re-enter the character correctly.  
to move  
Press ENTER to save the name.  
2.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current setting for  
Reduction margin  
Your fax machine’s reduction margin is measured in millimeters (mm). We’ll define  
reduction margin by explaining how it’s used:  
5
6
7
half-page reception:  
Half Page Recpt:Off  
Program/Enter  
When a fax message enters your machine’s electronic brain, the machine measures  
the message’s length and compares it to (a ) the length of your selected paper p lu s  
(b) the reduction margin you set. If the length of the incoming message is shorter  
than (a ) and (b) put together, your machine prints the message on just one sheet.  
If it’s longer, your machine prints the message on more than one sheet.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears. In this example,  
we’ve chosen On.  
Half Page Recpt:On  
Program/Enter  
Note: An Auto reduction setting and a reduction margin setting of 40mm will  
print most incoming faxes as single pages. Try this combination first and  
then, only if you have problems with it, select different settings.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Half-page reception  
Half-page reception can conserve paper if some of the faxes you receive are half-  
page, “memo-sized” messages. When activated, this feature tells the machine to  
combine two of these half-page receptions onto a single sheet. Half-page reception  
only combines half-page messages sent back-to-back during the same transmission.  
It won’t combine two half-page faxes from separate transmissions.  
Image Rotation  
When this feature is activated, incoming fax messages will be rotated automatically  
to fit on the paper.  
8.5"  
Adjusting the print settings  
Your  
Fax  
Machine  
11"  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the current print  
J
1
11"  
reduction rate:  
Prnt Reduc Rate:Auto  
Program/Enter  
8.5"  
A
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the reduction setting you want appears.  
2
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 8, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
2
In this example, we’ve chosen 91%.  
Rotate Rx  
:Off  
Prnt Reduc Rate: 91%  
Program/Enter  
Program/Enter  
Press  
we’ve chosen On.  
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears. In this example,  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current reduction margin:  
3
4
Prnt Reduc Rate: 91%  
Margin (00-85mm):40  
Rotate Rx  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the reduction margin you want. If  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
necessary, press  
or /P ROGRAM to move the cursor. In this example,  
we’ve chosen 38mm.  
Prnt Reduc Rate: 91%  
Margin (00-85mm):38  
2.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Setting the number of rings  
You can set how many times your fax machine will ring before answering a call.  
Choose from 1 to 10 rings.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
2
3
In this example, we’ve chosen Off.  
ECM Mode  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 5, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
J
1
Set # Of Rings  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
#
(01-10):02  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of rings you want, from 1 to 10.  
Here, we’ve chosen 4 rings.  
2
Setting silent mode  
Silent mode allows you to mute the ringer, the alarm and the key tones.  
Set # Of Rings  
•
Rin ger — If you turn the ringer off in silent mode, a ring alerts you when you  
receive fax or voice call and a call request.  
#
(01-10):04  
Note: If you enter 00 (zero), the machine will beep briefly to warn you that it  
•
Ala r m — If you disable the alarm in silent mode, the sound your machine  
makes when an error occurs and the beep your machine makes after sending or  
receiving a fax or making a copy cannot be heard.  
can’t accept that setting.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
•
Key ton e — If you mute the key tone, your machine will not make a sound when  
you press the buttons on the control panel.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 9, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:  
Setting ECM  
1
2
“Line noise,” or static on the line during a call, can easily disrupt the flow of data  
Silent Mode  
:Off  
from one fax machine to another.  
Program/Enter  
That’s why your fax machine gives you the option of using Error Correction Mode  
(ECM). When two fax machines communicate while running in ECM, the sending  
machine automatically checks the data as it sends. If the receiving fax machine can’t  
verify the transmission, the first machine will re-send it as necessary.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
In this example, we’ve chosen On.  
Silent Mode  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Note: ECM gives you a better chance of transmitting a fax document over a bad  
phone line, but it could also slow down the transmission time. And the worse  
the line is, the slower the transmission. That’s why the machine lets you  
turn ECM on or off as needed.  
Note: If you chose On, the silent mode of Ringer, Alarm or Key tone can be  
set to be avilable. If you chose Off, the machine will ring and beep as  
usual.  
Note: Not all fax machines have ECM. If you’ve activated ECM and then transmit to  
a fax machine not currently using ECM, there will be no change in the fax  
transmission from a usual, non-ECM transmission.  
If you chose Off, skip to step 10.  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the ringer to be  
on or off:  
3
4
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 0, 7, ENTER. The LCD shows the current ECM setting:  
1
Ringer Silent :Off  
Program/Enter  
ECM Mode  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
If you want to turn off the ringer, select “On” and the machine will be quiet.  
Otherwise, the machine will ring.  
2.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Setting the confirmation stamp  
You can set your fax machine so that it will automatically place a smallblue ink  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the alarm turned  
on or off:  
5
stamp mark on the front of each original document that it successfully scans.  
Alarm Silent :Off  
Program/Enter  
Im p or ta n t: Turn off this feature if you’re sending documents you don’t want the  
fax to stamp.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
6
7
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:  
1
2
If you want to turn off the alarm, select “On” and the machine will be quiet.  
Otherwise, the machine will beep.  
Stamp  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the key tones on  
or off:  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
In this example, we’ve chosen On.  
Key Buz.Silent :Off  
Program/Enter  
Stamp  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
8
9
If you want to turn off the tones, select “On” and the machine will be quiet.  
Otherwise, the machine will beep when the keys are pressed.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
If you turned off the alarm or the key tones in the steps above, your machine  
gives you the option of setting the volume for the alarm and key tones. If this  
option appears, skip to step 10.  
If you didn’t turn any of these off, your fax machine returns to standby mode.  
The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:  
10  
11  
Alarm&Key Vol. :Mid  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
Below are the possible settings:  
Alarm&Key Vol. :Max  
Program/Enter  
= Loudest setting.  
= Medium setting.  
= Low setting.  
Alarm&Key Vol. :Mid  
Program/Enter  
Alarm&Key Vol. :Min  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
12  
2.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Language settings  
English is the language your machine initially displays on the LCD and uses to print  
reports. But you can set it to “speak” French, Spanish or German, too.  
As you give the order for the machine to change languages, it “rolls” from English to  
French to Spanish to German, and then back to English.  
Printing your settings  
After you’ve programmed settings into your machine, print a settings list. We  
recommend this, particularly if you’re sharing the machine with other users, who  
might change the settings.  
With this list, you can quickly confirm that all of your settings are correct, without  
having to go back and check them on the machine. Or, if you do need to undo  
someone else’s changes, this list guides you in returning the machine to your  
preferred settings.  
To make the change from one language to the next, press /P ROGRAM, #.  
Checking the language  
Note: Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any  
If, after making a language change, you’re not sure which language is showing,  
press /P ROGRAM once and decide based on what you see on the LCD:  
settings you don’t recognize or understand.  
To print the settings list:  
A Num. Une-Touche  
is French.  
If the machine is in Fax mode, proceed to step 2.  
Program./Val.  
1
If it is in Copy mode, press COP Y/F AX to change to Fax mode.  
A Núm. Una-Tecla  
Press P ROGRAM, , 2, 1, ENTER. The display will show the following as the list  
prints:  
J
2
is Spanish.  
Program./Sel.  
Print Settings  
** Printing **  
A Zielwahl  
is German.  
Programm/Eing.  
If the language you see is the one you want, press STOP to return to standby mode.  
If you want to change languages, press STOP to return to standby mode.  
Then press /P ROGRAM, # again to go to the next language in the cycle.  
Printing a program list  
Your machine can also print a program list. This lists the functions available on your  
fax machine and the keystrokes needed to complete them.  
Note: Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any  
settings you don’t recognize or understand.  
To print a program list, press /P ROGRAM, *, 8.  
2.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Autodialer  
Your fax machine’s autodialer stores your most frequently called phone and fax  
numbers for instant recall so you don’t have to remember them. It’s something like  
an electronic phone book.  
Special Dialing Characters  
Your fax machine allows you to enter special dialing characters when programming  
the autodialer. These characters include hyphens and dashes, which make phone  
numbers easier to read, and special characters needed for international calls.  
The chart below briefly describes each of these characters. It also tells you what  
keys to press on your fax machine to store those characters in your autodialer:  
Autodialer basics  
How do you autodial?  
There are two kinds of autodialer numbers. The difference between the two is how  
you dial them:  
Ch a r. Wh a t it d oes  
Keystr ok e(s)  
Makes long numbers easier to read.  
Typ e  
How to d ia l  
Am ou n t stor ed  
DIALING OP TIONS (once)  
DIALING OP TIONS (twice)  
DIALING OP TIONS (3 times)  
–
/
!
Doesn’t change fax machine operation.  
One-touch  
Press one of the keys, marked 01–72  
on the right side of the control panel  
72  
(Has no effect in the United States.)  
Speed-dial  
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX followed by a  
three-digit identifier, from 001 to 128  
128  
Tells your fax machine to pause until it  
“hears” a dial tone.  
Tota l a m ou n t of n u m ber s stor ed  
200  
Enters a pause. Each pause lasts two  
seconds (or whatever length you set; see  
page 1.18). Each pause uses two of the  
characters you can store in one phone  
number.  
Autodialing fax and phone numbers  
Your fax machine’s autodialer will hold more than just fax numbers. You can store  
phone numbers, too.  
REDIAL/PAUSE [after you enter  
at least one other character]  
–/  
–!  
This is because when you use the autodialer to dial a number, the fax checks to see  
if there’s a document in its feeder. If there is, the machine dials as a fax machine. If  
there isn’t, it dials as a phone.  
If your fax machine is on a pulse (not  
tone-dialing) line, switches from pulse-  
dialing to tone (“DTMF”)-dialing. Use after  
the actual phone number but before any  
characters (such as a long-distance  
carrier’s access code) which must be in  
DTMF tone. Do not use on a tone line.  
DIALING OP TIONS (4 times)  
Location IDs and the EasyDial directory  
When you store numbers in your autodialer, you can give these numbers descriptive  
names, such as “Chicago office” or “Billing department”. Your machine calls this  
name a Location ID.  
Your machine’s autodialer sorts these location IDs alphabetically. Using your  
EasyDial directory, you can look up these numbers by their descriptive names, just  
as if you were using a phone book.  
We’ll explain how to store the numbers and location IDs in the next few pages. The  
EasyDial directory is discussed in detail on page 2.15.  
2.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Call groups  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may  
want to review “Special dialing characters,” page 2.7.) The number can be up  
to 40 characters in length:  
5
As you set up your autodialer, you may also want to set up call groups. These are sets  
of phone numbers that make it easy to send the same fax to many different loca-  
tions. For example, one call group may include all of your clients in one city, another  
group may include all of your employees and another may include all your vendors.  
02:Fax Number  
9-1-5559292039_  
Your fax machine can:  
•
•
•
Store as many as 200 numbers in up to 32 call groups  
Store one number in as many as 32 different groups  
Print a directory of your call groups (see page 2.14)  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press  
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.  
Note: If want to erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
If you want to change just one character in the number, press  
to  
move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to  
erase the character. Then re-enter the character correctly.  
Using one-touch numbers  
Your fax machine stores up to 72 one-touch numbers using the keys marked 01–72.  
When the number is as you want it, press ENTER to store it.  
6
7
The LCD now displays either:  
Entering or changing a one-touch number  
02:Alt. No.  
_
02:Alt. No.  
9-1-555-987-6553_  
Press /P ROGRAM, A, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the empty one-touch number.  
or  
1
Select One-Touch  
01:No Number Stored  
You now have the option to enter (or change) an alternative number. Your fax  
machine will dial this alternative number during a transmission or polling  
operation (see pages 2.31–2.33) after all redial attempts to the regular num-  
ber fail (see page 1.22). If the alternative number also fails, the fax alarm  
beeps to alert you to a problem.  
Note: If a one-touch number other than 01 appears on the LCD, it means  
that you have already entered a number for 01.  
Press the one-touch key in which you want to store a number or change a  
previously stored number. Here, we’ve selected 02 and the LCD shows either:  
2
Note: You can enter one alternative number for one speed-dial or one-touch  
number you entered. Your fax holds a maximum of 10 alternative  
numbers in all, that is, only 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers can  
have the alternative number. After you have entered the alternative  
numbers for 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers, the fax will no  
longer show this display.  
Select One-Touch  
02:No Number Stored  
Select One-Touch  
02:9-1-555-987-6543  
or  
If you want to select a different one-touch key, press that key now.  
3
4
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for  
this one-touch number, the LCD now shows either:  
If you want to enter (or change) an alternative number, enter it now.  
The number can be up to 40 characters long.  
If you do not want to enter or change an alternative number, go on to step 8.  
02:Fax Number  
_
02:Fax Number  
9-1-555-987-6543_  
or  
Press ENTER.  
8
2.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
The LCD now displays:  
The LCD now displays:  
9
12  
13  
02:Name  
_
;Upper  
02:Name  
;Upper  
02:Group No.  
_
02:Group No.  
2,6_  
or  
or  
S. W. Region Office_  
The machine is now prompting you for a name — a Location ID — so you’ll be  
able to find it in the EasyDial directory (see page 2.15).  
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review  
“Call groups,” page 2.8.)  
If you do not want to enter or change this Location ID, skip to step 11.  
If you do want to enter or change this Location ID, go on to step 10.  
If you do not want to change this number’s call group, go to step 14.  
If you do want to change this number’s call group, go on to step 13.  
Enter the Location ID the same way you entered your fax name during  
EasyStart. A number’s Location ID may be up to 24 characters in length.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups for this number. There are 32  
possible call groups, numbered 1–32.  
10  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters  
Here, we’ve entered 3 to assign this one-touch number to Call Group 3:  
by using the one-touch keys.  
02:Group No.  
3_  
02:Name  
_
;Upper  
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a  
comma after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP DIAL. For  
example, if you enter 3, GROUP DIAL, 1, 6, GROUP DIAL, 2, 7 to assign this one-  
touch number to Call Groups 3, 16 and 27, the LCD shows:  
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-  
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an (not an r).  
R
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display changes to:  
02:Group No.  
3,16,27_  
02:Name  
_
;Lower  
Note: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
R
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change just one character in the setting, press  
to move the cursor  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.  
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the  
character. Then re-enter it correctly.  
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, use the one-touch keys.  
Press ENTER.  
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the  
explanation on page 2.2.  
14  
The LCD will display the next empty one-touch number.  
If you do want to enter this one-touch number, go back to step 4.  
If you do not want to enter any more one-touch numbers, press STOP to finish.  
If you do not want to enter the currently displayed one-touch number but do  
want to enter another one-touch number, go back to step 2.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change just one character in the name, press  
to move the cursor  
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the  
character. Then re-enter it correctly.  
Use the autodialer labels in your fax’s packaging to write down the stored numbers  
for easy reference. You can also print out a directory of your call groups.  
See page 2.14.  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
11  
2.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
If you specified transmission from the feeder:  
One-touch fax dialing  
To dial a fax call using a one-touch number:  
•
•
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.  
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scan-  
ner, transmitting as it goes.  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
•
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Katz’s Cat Care  
A4 Normal  
Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by  
pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.  
Press the one-touch key in which you’ve stored the number.  
4
What happens next depends on whether you specified transmission from memory or  
transmission from the feeder:  
One-touch phone dialing  
To dial a phone call using a one-touch number, you must have an optional handset  
attached to your machine. (Contact your authorized Muratec dealer to order an  
optional handset.)  
If you specified Quick Memory transmission:  
•
Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory, then dials  
the other fax machine.  
To make the call:  
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:  
•
•
While dialing, your machine scans the other documents into memory.  
1
•
•
Lift the handset  
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:  
Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker  
Katz’s Cat Care  
A4 Normal  
Press the one-touch key in which you’ve stored the number. As the machine  
dials, it shows the number on the LCD:  
2
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document  
directly from memory. (To review Quick Memory transmission, see page 2.31.)  
** Tel Mode **  
9-555-2842_  
•
Note: Remember that your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.  
If you dialed by using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to  
the person that answers.  
If you specified normal transmission from memory:  
•
Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory first, then dials the  
other fax machine.  
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to  
•
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:  
hang up.  
Katz’s Cat Care  
A4 Normal  
Erasing a one-touch number  
Press /P ROGRAM, A, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the one-touch number you  
have already entered:  
1
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the document directly from  
memory. (To review memory transmission, see page 1.18.)  
•
Select One-Touch  
01:9-1-555-345-6789  
Note: If the one-touch number that appears is other than 01, it means that  
01 is empty.  
2.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired speed-dial number’s three-digit  
Press the key for the one-touch number you want to erase.  
Here, we’ve selected 02:  
2
2
3
identifier code. Here, we’ve entered 005 and the LCD shows either:  
Select One-Touch  
02:9-1-555-987-6543  
Enter Speed-Dial No. Enter Speed-Dial No.  
005:No Number Stored or 005:9-555-397-0123  
If you want to erase a number stored in a different one-touch key than what  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
If you want to select a different speed-dial number, press that number’s three-  
digit identifier code now. That number appears on the LCD.  
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Im p or ta n t: When entering the identifier code for speed-dial numbers less  
than 100, you must enter leading zeros to make three digits. For  
example, 001-099.  
Erase One-Touch  
Check Program/Enter  
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for  
this speed-dial number, the LCD now shows either:  
4
5
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the one-touch number  
you’ve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.  
005:Fax Number  
_
005:Fax Number  
9-555-397-0123_  
or  
Press ENTER to erase the number.  
5
Erase One-Touch  
** Complete **  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the speed-dial number exactly as your  
machine should dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system  
requires. (You may want to review “Special dialing characters,” page 2.7.) The  
number can be up to 40 characters in length:  
To erase another one-touch number, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to return to  
standby mode.  
005:Fax Number  
9-1-555-567-1234_  
Printing a list of one-touch numbers  
Forgot which number is stored in which one-touch key? Just print a list of your one-  
touch numbers. The list includes each key’s number, the Location ID (if any),  
fax/telephone number and group number(s) you’ve stored in the key.  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press  
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To print a list of one-touch numbers, press /P ROGRAM, A, 3, ENTER.  
To change one character in the number, press  
to move the cursor  
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the charac-  
ter. Then re-enter the number correctly.  
Using speed-dial numbers  
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER to store it.  
6
Your fax machine will store up to 128 speed-dial numbers, designated by three-digit  
identifier codes from 001 through 128.  
Entering or changing a speed-dial number  
Press /P ROGRAM, B, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows an empty speed-dial number:  
1
Enter Speed-Dial No.  
001:No Number Stored  
Note: If a speed-dial number other than 001 appears on the LCD, it means  
you have already entered a number for 001.  
2.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display changes to:  
The LCD now displays either:  
7
005:Name ;Lower  
_
005:Alt. No.  
_
005:Alt. No.  
9-1-555-789-3556_  
or  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
R
You now have the option to enter (or change) an alternative number. Your fax  
machine will dial this alternative number during a transmission or polling  
operation (see pages 2.31–2.33) only after redials to the regular number have  
failed. If the alternative number also fails, the fax alarm beeps to alert you to  
a problem.  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.  
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.  
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the  
Note: You can enter one alternative number for one speed-dial or one-touch  
number you entered. Your fax holds a maximum of 10 alternative  
numbers in all, that is, only 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers can  
have the alternative number. After you have entered the alternative  
numbers for 10 speed-dials or one-touch numbers, the fax will no  
longer show this display.  
explanation on page 2.2.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change one character in the name, press  
or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the character.  
Then re-enter the name correctly.  
to move the cursor left,  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
If you do not want to enter or change an alternative number, skip to step 8.  
If you do want to enter or change an alternative number, use the numeric  
keypad to do so the same way you did in step 5. This number can be up to 40  
characters long  
11  
12  
The LCD now displays:  
005:Group No.  
_
005:Group No.  
1,4,12_  
or  
Press ENTER.  
8
9
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review  
“Call groups,” page 2.8.)  
The LCD now displays:  
005:Name ;Upper  
_
005:Name ;Upper  
West Coast Sales_  
or  
If you do not want to change this number’s call group, skip to step 14.  
If you do want to change this number’s call group, go on to step 13.  
The machine is now prompting you for a name — a Location ID — so you’ll be  
able to find it in the EasyDial directory (see page 2.15).  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups for this number. There are 32  
possible call groups, numbered 1–32.  
13  
If you don’t want to enter or change this number’s Location ID, skip to step 11.  
Here, we’ve entered 6 to assign this speed-dial number to Call Group 6:  
If you do want to enter or change this number’s Location ID, go on to step 10.  
005:Group No.  
6_  
Enter the Location ID the same way you entered your fax name during  
EasyStart. A number’s Location ID may be up to 24 characters in length.  
10  
Note: You d o n ot have to insert a leading zero for the call group number.  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters  
by using the one-touch keys.  
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a comma  
after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP DIAL.  
Here, we’ve entered 6, GROUP DIAL, 1,7, GROUP DIAL, 3, 0 to assign this speed-  
dial number to Call Groups 6, 17 and 30:  
005:Name ;Upper  
_
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-  
005:Group No.  
6,17,30_  
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
Note: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).  
2.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.  
To change just one character, press  
/P ROGRAM to move it to the right. Press CANCEL to erase the charac-  
ter. Then re-enter the setting correctly.  
to move the cursor to the left, or  
•
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document  
directly from memory. (To review quick memory transmission, see page 2.31.)  
If you specified normal transmission from memory:  
Press ENTER.  
14  
•
Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory, then dials the other  
fax machine.  
The LCD will display the next empty speed-dial number.  
If you want to enter this speed-dial number, go back to step 4.  
If you do not want to enter any more speed-dial numbers, press STOP to finish.  
If you do not want to enter the currently displayed speed-dial number but do  
want to enter another speed-dial number, go back to step 2.  
•
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:  
Shipping & Receiving  
A4 Normal  
Fax dialing via speed-dial  
Note: If the speed-dial entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.  
To dial a fax call using a speed-dial number:  
•
When the other machine answers, your fax will transmit the document directly  
from memory. (To review memory transmission, see page 1.18.)  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
If you specified transmission from the feeder:  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
•
•
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.  
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its  
scanner, transmitting as it goes.  
Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by  
pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
•
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:  
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD shows:  
4
Shipping & Receiving  
A4 Normal  
Enter Speed-Dial No.  
S_  
Note: If the speed-dial number doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, in this  
5
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCD shows:  
Phoning via speed-dial  
To dial a phone call using a speed-dial number, you must have an optional handset  
attached to your machine. To make the call:  
Shipping & Receiving  
S018_  
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:  
Press START.  
1
6
•
•
Lift the handset  
What happens next depends on whether you specified transmission from memory or  
transmission from the feeder:  
Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker  
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD shows:  
2
3
If you specified quick memory transmission:  
** Tel Mode **  
S_  
•
Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory, then dials  
the other fax machine.  
•
•
While dialing, your machine scans the other documents into memory.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, in this  
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCD shows:  
The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:  
** Tel Mode **  
9-555-5783_  
Shipping & Receiving  
A4 Normal  
2.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Note: Remember that your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.  
Printing a call group directory  
Your machine can also print a call group directory. (If necessary, review “Call groups,”  
page 2.8.) This lists all your stored autodialer numbers by Location ID and lists the  
groups to which these numbers belong.  
If you dialed using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to the  
person that answers!  
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to  
hang up.  
The directory divides the call groups into four banks, 01–09 (the list shows 00), 10–19  
(the list shows 10), 20–29 (the list shows 20) and 30–32 (the list shows 30). If you spec-  
ify call group 0 (which puts the number in all call groups), the directory shows all  
numbers (see below).  
Erasing a speed-dial number  
Press /P ROGRAM, B, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the speed-dial number you  
1
have already entered:  
For example, the directory might show:  
Enter Speed-Dial No.  
001:9-555-584-6950  
No. Location  
00  
10  
20  
30  
S001And Sew I 2 4  
S002KC Enterp  
Note: If the speed-dial number that appears is other than 001, it means  
7 0  
0
1
that 001 is empty.  
S003Katz Cat  
[01]Carson Co  
0
2
4
4
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial  
number you want to erase. Here, we’ve selected 005:  
2
[02]Tex. Ofc. 1  
[03]e.e.gummi 12345678901234567890123456789012  
Enter Speed-Dial No.  
005:9-1-555-987-6543  
In this list, speed-dial number 001 (S001) is in call groups 2 and 4; speed-dial num-  
ber 002 (S002) is in groups 7, 10 and 21; speed-dial number 003 (S003) is in groups  
20 and 32; one-touch number 01 ([01]) is in groups 4, 10 and 14; one-touch number  
02 ([02]) is in group 1; and one-touch number 03 ([03]) is in all groups, 1 to 32.  
If you want to erase a different speed-dial number than the one that appears  
on the LCD, enter that number now.  
3
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
To print a call group directory, press /P ROGRAM,  
H
,
ENTER.  
4
Erase Speed-Dial  
Check Program/Enter  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the speed-dial number  
you’ve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.  
Press ENTER to erase the number.  
5
Erase Speed-Dial  
** Complete **  
To erase another speed-dial number, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to return to  
standby mode.  
Printing a list of speed-dial numbers  
You can easily print a list of your speed-dial numbers. The list includes each number’s  
three-digit identifier, the Location ID (if any), number and any group numbers  
you’ve stored for that speed-dial number.  
To print a list of speed-dial numbers, press /P ROGRAM, B, 3, ENTER.  
2.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
If an EasyDial call fails  
If an EasyDial call fails, what happens next depends upon the kind of call it was.  
EasyDial directory dialing  
EasyDial directory dialing makes your autodialer even more like an electronic  
phone book. EasyDial sorts and displays numbers alphabetically according to their  
Location IDs, so you can find them and dial them easily.  
If it was a fax call …  
… Your fax machine automatically redials the number according to the redial inter-  
val you’ve set (see page 1.22). It keeps trying until either of the following occurs:  
To dial using EasyDial:  
For a regular phone call: Make sure there’s no document in the feeder, then  
skip to step 4.  
For a fax call: Insert the document.  
•
•
It successfully reaches the other number  
1
It has attempted the number of redials programmed and has still not connected  
(see “Changing redial settings,” page 1.22).  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
2
3
If it was a regular phone call …  
If you want to toggle between transmission from memory and transmission  
from the feeder, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
… You’ll have to redial manually:  
Obtain a dial tone by eith er lifting the handset or pressing MONITOR/CALL.  
1
2
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX twice. The LCD shows the first listing in your fax  
machine’s EasyDial directory:  
4
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.  
Telephone Index [A]  
Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to  
hang up. Or if you’ve pressed START to begin the transmission, press STOP to  
end it.  
ABC Company  
:[01]  
The EasyDial directory sorts entries alphabetically in the following order:  
(1) by alphabet, (2) by number and (3) by symbol.  
If the listing that appears is the one you want to dial, skip to step 6.  
Scroll through the listings to find the one you want. You do this by pressing  
the following keys on the numeric keypad:  
5
6
•
2 or 8 to select the character set — alphabet, number or symbol — for the  
first character of the Location ID.  
•
4 or 6 to check different listings within that character set.  
Note: The scrolling is “open-ended.” For example, when you run out of  
listings beginning with alphabet “A”, pressing 4 or 6 automatically  
moves you into listings beginning with other characters.  
When the LCD displays the name you want to dial, press START.  
•
•
If there is a document in the feeder, your machine will dial a fax call.  
If there isn’t a document in the feeder, your machine will activate the mon-  
itor speaker and dial a regular phone call. At this point, you may either:  
— Lift the handset now  
or  
— Listen to the monitor speaker until you hear the other person answer,  
and then lift the handset.  
To make a regular phone call from your machine, you must have an  
optional handset attached.  
2.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Broadcasting  
Broadcasting basics  
The fastest way to fax one document to many recipients is to broadcast it.  
Delayed broadcasting  
What if you want the broadcast to take place later? That’s the purpose of setting up  
a delayed broadcast.  
In an ordinary broadcast, you send the fax as you normally would, except you just  
add more fax numbers. You can enter up to 230 numbers:  
Note: Delayed commands are discussed in detail later. You may want to read  
“Delayed transmission” on page 2.17 before proceeding.  
• 30 manually-dialed numbers AND  
• 200 autodialer numbers OR 1 call group with all 200 autodialer numbers  
Follow steps 1–4 of “Broadcasting basics” (left column).  
1
2
3
You ca n br oa d ca st u sin g a n y fu n ction th a t r equ ir es a fa x n u m ber to be  
en ter ed . That means you can send a delayed broadcast, program a polling broad-  
cast and even broadcast to “hub” units for F-Code relay broadcast initiation. All of  
these are explained in this chapter.  
Press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and time (in 24-hour  
format) when you want the broadcast to occur.  
Here, we’ve scheduled it for 10:15 PM on the 30th.  
To send a broadcast fax:  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as you would for a  
regular fax transmission.  
1
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/22:15  
Press BROADCAST.  
2
3
When finished, press ENTER to save the setting.  
Enter the first fax number, as usual. Use either a one-touch number, a speed-  
dial number, a call group or a regular number dialed from the numeric keypad.  
Press START. Your machine will return to standby mode, while showing this on  
the LCD:  
4
To add more fax numbers, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a  
comma. Then enter the number as described in step 3 (GROUP DIAL inserts its own  
comma). You can send to up to 230 numbers for a broadcast.  
4
** Reserved **  
Jan 29 2000 17:17  
Press Start  
This means your fax machine is “reserved” for the delayed broadcast you  
just programmed, but it can still be used to send and receive faxes if your  
broadcast document is stored in memory.  
[03],S098,[10],9-555  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.  
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press CANCEL to erase them.  
Making changes to broadcasts  
Press START. Your fax machine scans the document into memory and then  
sends it to each number or call group you’ve entered.  
5
If you need to make changes in a broadcast after setting it up, use the REVIEW  
COMMANDS function. See “Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast,” page 2.18.  
2.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Delayed transmission  
Take advantage of lower evening and weekend long-distance rates with delayed  
transmission. Your fax machine can store up to 99 delayed commands, each of which  
you can program up to 31 days in advance.  
When the date and time are entered, press ENTER to save the delayed trans-  
mission. The LCD shows:  
5
6
Enter Fax Number  
_
Im p or ta n t: If you program all 99 delayed transmission commands, no further  
memory transmission is possible until one or more of the commands is  
completed. (To review memory transmission, see page 1.18.) However,  
if all 99 delayed commands are programmed, you can always transmit  
manually using monitor/speaker dialing or an optional handset (see  
page 1.21).  
Enter the fax number for the delayed transmission document. You can either  
press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number or use the numeric keypad  
to enter the fax number.  
Note: If you want to erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
If you want to change just one character in the number, press  
to  
move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to  
erase it. Then re-enter the number correctly.  
Setting up a delayed transmission  
Im p or ta n t: Your machine only remembers the day of the month that it’s supposed  
to send a delayed transmission. It does not remember the month  
itself. So if you want to send a transmission at 5:05 PM on J u n e 26,  
don’t program the transmission sooner than 5:06 PM on Ma y 26.  
Press START. Your machine returns to standby mode, while showing this on  
the LCD:  
7
** Reserved **  
Jan 29 2000 17:17  
To set up a delayed transmission:  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.  
This means your fax machine is “reserved” for the delayed transmission you  
just programmed.  
1
2
Press COM-OP TIONS. The LCD shows:  
•
If you set the machine for memory transmission, it will scan the document  
into memory, after which you can use the machine normally.  
1.Delayed  
Program/Enter  
•
If you set the machine for manual transmission, the machine can receive  
faxes but can’t transmit until your delayed command has been performed.  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the current day of the month, followed by the  
current time (in 24-hour format):  
3
Im p or ta n t: If you’ve stored too much information in your machine’s memory, a  
“Memory Overflow” message may appear on the LCD. This appears  
because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory, or (2)  
the pages that are stored have too much information on them for your  
fax machine to remember.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 06/17:16  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and the time when you  
want the fax to send the delayed transmission.  
If this message appears, press START to tell your fax to keep as many  
pages in memory as possible, or press CANCEL to delete from memory  
all pages stored during the current operation (but not previous opera-  
tions).  
4
Note: Press  
to move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right.  
Here, we’ve set the transmission to occur on the 11th at 11:05 PM:  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 11/23:05  
2.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast  
You also can review or cancel certain numbers within a broadcast:  
Reviewing or canceling delayed commands  
If you’ve stored a delayed command in your fax machine, it will hold it in memory  
until it either completes the command successfully or reaches its maximum number  
of redial attempts (see page 1.22). Your machine can store up to 99 delayed com-  
mands. It identifies each by a two-digit command number ranging from 01 to 99.  
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.  
1
2
Press /P R OGR AM or  
to scroll through currently stored commands.  
To see your machine’s stored commands or to cancel them:  
Note: Stop this operation at any time by pressing STOP.  
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.  
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL, CANCEL.  
If you want to review individual numbers within this broadcast, go on to  
step 4 without pressing CANCEL.  
1
3
•
If th er e a r e n o stor ed com m a n d s in you r m a ch in e — It beeps briefly  
and displays “No Command” on the LCD. It then returns to standby mode.  
•
If there are commands in your machine’s memory, the LCD shows:  
To review individual numbers within this broadcast, press BROADCAST to see  
the first number. The LCD shows:  
4
C01:9-5552311  
Program/Cancel  
9-5550388  
Program/Cancel  
Here, you see command 01, followed by the number it’s set to dial. If the com-  
mand is to send a broadcast, “Broadcast” appears instead of the phone  
number. (See “Broadcasting,” page 2.16.)  
Press /P R OGR AM or  
until you find the number you want to cancel.  
5
6
Press CANCEL, CANCEL. The next number will appear.  
If you want to cancel this number, also, repeat this step.  
If you want to cancel a different number, go back to step 5.  
If you don’t want to cancel any more numbers, press STOP . The machine  
returns to standby mode.  
If the command is to send a batch transmission, the LCD shows its batch box  
number (such as “B01”) rather than the command number. (See “Batch trans-  
mission,” pages 2.20–2.23.)  
If the command is for a continuous polling operation, the LCD shows its contin-  
uous polling operation number (such as “P01”) rather than the command  
number. (See “Polling,” on pages 2.31–2.33.)  
Note: If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it appears  
on the display.  
Press /P R OGR AM or  
to scroll through currently stored commands.  
2
3
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL. The LCD shows:  
C01:9-5552311  
Check Program/Cancel  
To keep this command but to continue reviewing stored commands, press  
/P R OGR AM. Go back to step 2.  
To keep this command and stop reviewing commands, press STOP to return  
your machine to standby mode.  
4
To go ahead with cancelling the command, press CANCEL again. Go back to  
step 2 to view other delayed commands.  
Note: See also “Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast,” next column.  
2.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Printing a delayed command list  
Your machine can print a command list which tells you:  
•
•
•
•
The command’s identification number  
The phone number, or “remote location”  
The start time (this appears in a DD,HH:MM format)  
A “note” telling if the command is a polling or F-Code operation (see pages  
2.31–2.33 for more on polling and 2.38–2.47 for more on F-Code communication).  
To print a delayed command list, press /P ROGRAM, , 1, ENTER.  
F
Printing a stored document  
Your fax machine can print out each document stored for delayed transmission. To  
print a stored document, you’ll need to know the document’s command number,  
which you can get by either reviewing the commands (see page 2.18) or printing a  
delayed command list (see above).  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
F
1
Print Stored Doc.  
Command No. :_  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the command’s identification number, 01–99.  
For example, we could enter the following for the very first command, 01:  
2
Print Stored Doc.  
Command No. :01_  
Press ENTER. Your fax machine will print a copy of the stored document.  
3
2.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Batch transmission  
Batch transmission allows you to store multiple documents in an electronic “basket”  
throughout the day and then fax that entire basket to one location.  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.  
To do this, just tell the machine when and where the transmission should go. When  
that date and time arrives, your machine will transmit each document in the batch  
box to the remote fax machine. You can store up to 40 documents (each document  
can include one page or many pages) into your machine’s five electronic batch boxes.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change just one number, press  
to move the cursor left, or  
/P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it. Then re-enter  
the number correctly.  
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER. The LCD now displays:  
6
7
3:Transmit Time  
Enter Time: 26/14:00  
Creating or modifying a batch box  
Before sending a batch transmission, you have to create batch boxes in your fax  
machine. The steps below also let you modify existing batch boxes.  
Instruct your fax to send from this batch box in one of the following ways:  
To create or modify a batch box:  
Op tion 1:  
Once at a certain time on a certain day of the month (For exam-  
ple: “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”) — Use the numeric keypad  
to enter the date and time (24-hour format) the machine should  
send the documents from the batch box:  
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a  
number entered for batch box 1, the LCD shows:  
1
Select Batch Box  
1:No Number Stored  
Select Batch Box  
1:9-1-555-345-6789  
or  
3:Transmit Time  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box you want  
to create or modify. Here, we’ve pressed 3 and see either:  
2
Op tion 2:  
At a certain time each day you press the key (For example: “Do  
this at 5:05 PM today.”) — Use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0  
(00), and then the time when the fax should send the documents  
from the batch box:  
Select Batch Box  
3:No Number Stored  
Select Batch Box  
3:9-555-2110  
or  
3:Transmit Time  
If you want to select a different batch box than the one displayed on the LCD,  
use the numeric keypad to enter the batch box number now.  
3
4
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:  
Note: To change a digit in the date or the time, press  
to move the cursor  
left or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Then enter the correct number.  
3:Fax Number  
_
3:Fax Number  
9-555-2110_  
or  
When the date and time are set, press ENTER.  
8
9
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number exactly as your machine  
should dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires.  
(You may want to review “Special dialing characters,” page 2.7.) The number  
can be up to 40 characters in length:  
The LCD now displays:  
5
3:Name  
_
;Upper  
3:Name  
Bookkeeping_  
;Upper  
or  
3:Fax Number  
9-1-555-871-9052_  
The machine now asks you to name this batch box.  
If you do not want to enter or change this batch box’s name, skip to step 11.  
2.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Storing a document for batch transmission  
Your fax machine can store up to 40 documents (each document can include one  
page or many pages) in each batch box until the date and time you designate the  
batch transmission to take place. Once the batch documents are transmitted, they  
are automatically erased from the machine’s memory.  
Enter the name the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart.  
A batch box’s name may be up to 24 characters in length.  
10  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters  
by using the one-touch keys.  
3:Name  
_
;Upper  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
•
•
The batch box must exist on your fax machine.  
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-  
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an (not an r).  
You must know the batch box’s one-digit number (1–5).  
R
To store a document in a batch box for batch transmission:  
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display will change to:  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.  
1
2
3:Name  
_
;Lower  
Press COM-OP TIONS three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
R
_
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit number for the batch box you  
want to use. Here, we’ve entered 5 to indicate batch box 5.  
3
4
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.  
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the  
explanation on page 2.2, if necessary.  
5_  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
Note: Tx is a common abbreviation for transmission.  
To change just one character in the name, press  
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it. Then re-  
enter the name correctly.  
to move the cursor  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Press Start  
Box: 5 File: 01  
Press ENTER to save the batch box information.  
11  
Im p or ta n t: Your machine gives each document in a batch box a file number,  
shown as 01 above. You will need to know this file number  
should you later wish to erase or print the stored document.  
Each batch box holds up to 40 files (01-40).  
To create or modify another batch box, repeat steps 2–11. To finish, press STOP.  
Printing a list of batch boxes  
You can easily print a list of your batch boxes. The list includes each box’s identifier  
number, the Location ID, fax number and date/time the transmission should start.  
Press START. The machine displays “Reserved” on the top line of the LCD. This  
means the document is stored in memory.  
5
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, N, 2, ENTER.  
Printing a list of stored batch documents  
You can print a list of the documents stored in your machine’s batch boxes. This list  
provides you with the documents’ file numbers so you can erase or print them as  
needed.  
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, N, 3, ENTER.  
2.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Printing a document stored in a batch box  
To print a document stored in a batch box:  
Erasing a document stored in a batch box  
To erase a document stored in a batch box on your fax machine:  
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 6, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
1
Print Batch Doc.  
Erase Batch Doc.  
Enter Box No.  
_
Enter Box No.  
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box storing the  
document you want to print.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box storing the  
document you want to erase.  
2
3
2
3
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Print Batch Doc.  
Enter File No.  
Erase Batch Doc.  
Enter File No.  
_
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document’s two-digit file number (01–40).  
If the file number is 01–09, be sure to enter the leading zero.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document’s two-digit file number (01–40).  
If the file number is 01–09, be sure to enter the leading zero.  
4
5
4
5
Press ENTER.  
Press ENTER. The fax machine now gives you one last chance to change your  
mind before erasing the document.  
Your fax machine prints the document, then returns to standby mode.  
Erase Batch Doc.  
Check  
Enter/Stop  
Im p or ta n t: To quit the operation without erasing this or any document,  
press STOP. The machine returns to standby mode.  
Press ENTER. The fax machine erases the document you’ve chosen, then  
returns to standby mode.  
6
2.22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Erasing an empty batch box  
Batch boxes must be empty to be erased. If a box has documents stored in it, then  
you first have to erase those documents. See page 2.22.  
To erase an empty batch box:  
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 5, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Select Batch Box  
Select Batch Box  
1:9-5551023  
or  
1:No Number Stored  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box you want  
to erase. Here, we’ve pressed 2 and see:  
2
Select Batch Box  
2:9-1-972-5559900  
If you want to erase a different batch box than what appears on the LCD, enter  
that batch box’s number now.  
3
4
Press ENTER. If the batch box is empty, the LCD shows:  
Erase Batch Box  
Check Program/Enter  
Im p or ta n t: If you select a batch box which is not empty, the machine beeps  
and briefly displays:  
Select Batch Box  
Document Stored  
Erase any documents stored in the batch box (see page 2.22),  
then go back to step 3.  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the batch box you’ve  
selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing any batch box, press STOP.  
The machine returns to standby mode.  
Press ENTER to erase the batch box.  
5
Erase Batch Box  
** Complete **  
To erase another batch box, repeat steps 2–5. To finish, press STOP.  
2.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Special features  
Your fax machine has numerous special features to make your communication easier.  
We’ll cover them here.  
Setting the Soft Key  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
E
,
ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Select Soft Key No.  
1:Stamp  
Soft Keys  
Soft Keys are shortcut keys. You can program the soft keys on the control panel to  
turn on or off any function with just the touch of a button. Your machine has three  
Soft Keys. If the light above any one of these keys glows, that means the setting  
programmed into that key is active.  
. . . or indicates another function you’ve stored into this key.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the Soft Key (1-3) you want to change appears.  
2
3
In this example, we’ve chosen 3.  
These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following functions on or off:  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
•
•
•
Confirmation stamp (see page 2.5)  
Confirmation report (see page 2.30)  
Memory transmission (see pages 1.18)  
3:Memory Tx  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the function appears that you want to program  
Note: The keys that are programmed at the factory turn the functions above them  
on and off, but only for the next transmission that you send from your fax  
machine. Once that transmission is complete, your machine returns to its  
default setting.  
4
5
into the key. In this example, we’ve chosen Cover page.  
3:Cover page  
Program/Enter  
But instead of using the Soft Keys to control the functions above, you can program  
them to turn other functions on or off. These functions are:  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
The LCD will display the next Soft Key.  
If you do want to set this Soft Key, go back step 3.  
If you do not want to set the currently displayed Soft Key but do want to set  
another Soft Key, go back to step 2.  
•
•
•
Send TTI (see “Getting Started,” page 1.15)  
Cover page (see page 2.28)  
Flash — Lets you quickly disconnect a call and go right to the next one without  
having to hang up the handset.  
If you do not want to set any more Soft Keys, press STOP to finish.  
Now you can use the labels included in your machine’s original packaging to label  
the Soft Key function you just set.  
Note: And instead of just turning the function on or off for the next transmission,  
as the factory-set keys do, changing the Soft Key settings actually sets the  
default for your fax machine. (These default settings can be changed, if  
necessary. They are not permanent.)  
2.24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Com mu n ica tion s fu n ction s:  
Macros  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Delayed transmission (explained on pages 2.17–2.19)  
Regular polling (page 2.31)  
In order to complete some operations on your machine, you may have to follow sev-  
eral steps and press several different buttons. But programming your machine’s  
Macro keys (MACRO 1 – MACRO 3) can reduce those many steps to a simple press of a  
key. You can “teach” the Macro keys to carry out any of the following jobs:  
Continuous polling (pages 2.32)  
Batch transmission (pages 2.20–2.23)  
F-Code transmission (pages 2.46–2.47)  
F-Code polling (page 2.47)  
Note: One Macro key can hold only one job. It cannot combine two or more jobs.  
Copy:  
•
Copy settings (Number of copies, Paper size, Sort on/off, Resolution, Contrast and  
Enlargement/Reduction) (pages 1.28–1.29)  
Programming the Macro key  
Press MACRO P ROGRAM, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
P r in tou ts:  
One-touch numbers list (pages 2.11)  
Select Macro Key  
M1:No Number Stored  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Speed-dial numbers list (pages 2.14)  
Programmable one-touch numbers list (pages 2.55)  
Delayed commands list (pages 2.19)  
Activity journal (pages 2.29)  
Press the Macro key (MACRO 1 – MACRO 3) you want to program or change. In  
this example, we’ve chosen MACRO 2.  
2
Select Macro Key  
M2:No Number Stored  
Call group directory (pages 2.14)  
Machine settings list (pages 2.6)  
Press ENTER. If you chose the key already programmed, proceed to step 4.  
Otherwise, skip to step 5.  
3
4
Sample cover page (pages 2.28)  
Department time list (pages 2.63)  
The LCD shows:  
Batch box list (pages 2.21)  
Overwrite?  
Check Program/Enter  
List of stored batch documents (pages 2.21)  
List of transfer pattern (pages 2.37)  
List of F-Code boxes (pages 2.42)  
If you want to overwrite the operation already programmed, press ENTER.  
If you want to overwrite only the job’s name, press P ROGRAM and go to step 9.  
If you do not want to overwrite the key you have choiced, press STOP  
List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (pages 2.42)  
Stored polling documents (pages 2.33)  
Delayed commands documents (pages 2.19)  
Security receive documents (pages 2.57)  
Batch transmission documents (pages 2.21)  
F-Code Box (bulletin box) documents (pages 2.43)  
.
The LCD of stand-by mode appears, which means the machine is ready to reg-  
ister the steps into the Macro key.  
5
Fax Ready  
Jan 11 2000 13:30  
Note: It keeps beeping during the job registration in order to make notice of  
Docu m en t stor a ge:  
the registration mode.  
•
•
Regular polling documents (pages 2.31)  
F-Code polling documents (pages 2.42)  
2.25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display will change to:  
Press the keys exactly as you operate the job you want to program into the  
Macro key.  
6
M2:Macro Name ;Lower  
_
Note: You can program up to 60 steps. When it comes over 60 steps, your fax  
machine asks if you register the operations you have entered. If you  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
R
want to register them, press ENTER. If not, press STOP  
.
Note: If you want to cancel the operations you have set, press  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.  
MACRO P ROGRAM, STOP and then go back to step 1.  
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.  
Example 1: To program some operations for copy: Press COP Y/F AX, and set  
number of the copies, paper size, contrast, resolution, reduction/enlargement  
rate and sort setting as you want.  
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the  
explanation on page 2.2, if necessary.  
Note: See “Making copies” (pages 1.28–1.31) for detail operations.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change just one character in the name, press  
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it. Then re-  
enter the name correctly.  
to move the cursor  
Example 2: To program the operations for printing the one-touch numbers  
list: Press /P ROGRAM, A, 3, ENTER.  
If you programmed ENTER or START into the operation, proceed to step 8.  
Otherwise, press MACRO P ROGRAM and skip to step 9.  
7
8
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
To program or modify another job, repeat steps 2–11. To finish, press STOP.  
11  
If you want to start immediately after pressing the Macro key when you use  
it, press ENTER. If not, press /P ROGRAM.  
Copying with the Macro key  
Note: If you want to confirm the settings or operations in the Macro key  
before you start it, press /P ROGRAM here.  
To copy using a Macro key:  
Insert the document.  
Include Start/Enter  
Check Program/Enter  
1
2
3
Press the Macro key in which you’ve stored the copy command.  
The LCD now displays:  
9
Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.  
M2:Macro Name ;Upper  
_
M2:Macro Name ;Upper  
Delayed_  
or  
Printing lists using the Macro key  
To print a list using a Macro key:  
The machine now asks you to name this job.  
If you do not want to enter or change this job’s name, skip to step 11.  
Press the Macro key in which you’ve stored the list operation you want to print.  
Enter the name the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart.  
A job’s name may be up to 130 characters in length.  
10  
Storing fax documents with the Macro key  
To store a fax document for either polling or F-Code polling using a Macro key:  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters  
by using the one-touch keys.  
Insert the document.  
1
2
M2:Macro Name ;Upper  
_
Press the Macro key which is programmed for the storing operation you want  
to use.  
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-  
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
Press ENTER, if you have not registered ENTER in the Macro key.  
3
2.26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
To erase another Macro key, repeat steps 2–4. Or press STOP to return to standby  
Fax dialing with the Macro key  
To dial a fax call using a Macro key:  
mode.  
Insert the document.  
Printing a list of your Macro keys  
Your fax machine can print a list of the Macro keys.  
1
2
3
Press the Macro key in which you’ve stored the fax communication command.  
The list includes:  
(1) each key’s Macro key number  
(2) the name of the job stored in the Macro key  
To print a list of Macro keys, press MACRO P ROGRAM three times, ENTER.  
Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.  
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.  
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCD shows:  
Setting the speed for Macros  
You can adjust the speed of one step in the Macro key.  
** Reserved **  
Jan 29 2000 17:17  
Press MACRO KEY four times, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it,  
the LCD shows the number:  
1
Macro Speed :Norm  
Program/Enter  
9-1-972-555-4335  
A4 Normal  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. The possible set-  
2
3
tings are:  
Erasing a Macro key  
Macro Speed :Norm  
Program/Enter  
Press MACRO P ROGRAM twice, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Select Macro Key  
M1:Activity journal  
Macro Speed :Slow  
Program/Enter  
Press the Macro key (MACRO 1 – MACRO 3) you want to erase. Here, we’ve cho-  
sen MACRO 2.  
2
Macro Speed :Fast  
Program/Enter  
Select Macro Key  
M2:Batch box list  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
3
Erase Macro  
Check Program/Enter  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the Macro key you’ve  
selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.  
Press ENTER to erase the job.  
4
Erase Macro  
** Complete **  
2.27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Entering the cover page message  
Cover page  
Press /P ROGRAM, K, 2, ENTER.  
Your fax machine can store a cover page to send at the beginning of each outgoing  
fax. This page includes the current date and time, your Location ID and your fax  
number (as stored in the TTI) and a message of up to 40 characters in length. The  
information appears in a box similar to this:  
1
2
Use the one-touch keypad to enter a message for the cover page. Enter the  
message the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart. The  
message can be up to 40 characters in length.  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters  
Fax Message From:  
Jan 11 2000 14:00  
by using the one-touch keys.  
Cover Page ;Upper  
_
Name:  
And Sew It Goes Co.  
972-555-2009  
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-  
Fax Number:  
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
[We appreciate your business. Thank you!]  
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display will change to:  
Cover Page ;Lower  
_
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
R
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
Turning the cover page on  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.  
Press /P ROGRAM, K, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.  
Cover Page  
:Off  
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the  
explanation on page 2.2.  
Program/Enter  
To tell the fax machine it should send a cover page before each document you  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
2
transmit, press  
or /P ROGRAM until “On” appears on the LCD.  
To change just one character in the message, press  
cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.  
Then re-enter the message correctly.  
to move the  
Cover Page  
:On  
Program/Enter  
When the message appears as you want it, press ENTER to save it.  
3
Note: To tell the machine not to send a cover page, press  
or  
/P ROGRAM  
until “Off” appears on the LCD and press STOP  
.
Printing the cover page  
To confirm that the cover page is set correctly, print a sample cover page from your  
fax machine. Press /P ROGRAM, K, 3, ENTER.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
Now the cover page feature is working but your message line (shown in the example  
as “We appreciate your business. Thank you!”) is blank. To enter that message, see  
“Entering the cover page message,” next column.  
2.28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Setting the printing order of the activity journal  
Your fax machine prints the activity journal for every fax transaction. For example,  
if your machine has to redial a call, it will list those redials on the journal.  
Setting the activity journal  
Just as a checkbook records your daily financial transactions, your fax machine  
keeps an activity journal which records its 100 most recent fax transactions. The  
activity journal lists the following information for each transaction:  
If you want to list those activities in the order of their assigned numbers, you can  
change the printing order of the activity journal. To change the printing order:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Assigned number, starting each day at 001  
Remote location called  
Press /P ROGRAM, G, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Resolution mode  
Line Up  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Starting date and time  
Duration, in minutes and seconds  
Length, in number of pages  
Department code (see pages 2.62–2.63)  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
2
3
If you want the activity journal to print in the order of assigned number,  
choose “On”.  
Otherwise, the machine will list every fax transaction of the same command  
and same location.  
Result of the call — If preceded by an asterisk (*), this signifies an ECM  
communication (see page 2.4)  
•
Any special operations — For example, a fax call made using an optional handset  
will appear as “Manual”  
Here, we’ve chosen On.  
Line Up  
:On  
Your fax machine will print the activity journal automatically after 100 transac-  
tions. To toggle this automatic printing on or off:  
Program/Enter  
Press /P ROGRAM, G, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
1
Auto Print  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen On.  
Auto Print  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Printing an activity journal manually  
To print an activity journal immediately without waiting for 100 transmissions to be  
completed, press /P ROGRAM, G, 2, ENTER.  
2.29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
To set the printing one of these reports:  
Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs  
Press /P ROGRAM, G, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Your fax machine can print reports of transmissions and receptions.  
1
TCR Selected  
Program/Enter  
There are two different reports: a transmit confirmation report (TCR) and a receive  
confirmation report (RCR). You can receive a TCR after sending a fax to any Group 3 fax  
machine, but the RCR function works only when you send a fax to a compatible Muratec  
machine. (Consult your authorized Muratec dealer with any questions about such  
compatibility.) Choose the type of report you want, based on the fax machines to  
which you’re transmitting.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.  
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen RCR.  
RCR Selected  
Program/Enter  
What the reports tell you  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows:  
TCR  
Auto Print  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
The TCR lists the following information for each communication:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date and time of the TCR’s printout  
Remote location called  
Your machine is asking if it should print the selected report automatically  
after every fax you send.  
Resolution mode  
Starting date and time  
Duration, in minutes and seconds  
Length, in number of pages  
Result of the call  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.  
4
5
Here, we’ve chosen On.  
Auto Print  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Any special operations — For example, a fax call made using an optional handset  
will appear as “Manual”  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
•
Sample of the document — An image of the first page of the document  
If an error occurs, the TCR tells you the remote location which was called, the error  
code and error message (see pages 3.9–3.11).  
To turn the confirmation report feature on or off for only the next fax transmission,  
press REP ORT.  
What happens next depends on the setting you chose:  
RCR  
•
If the light next to the REP ORT key glows, the fax machine will print the  
confirmation report automatically.  
The RCR lists the following information for each communication:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date and time  
•
If the light next to the REP ORT key doesn’t glow, the fax machine will not print a  
confirmation report.  
Remote location called  
Assigned number, starting each day at 001  
Resolution mode  
After you send this transmission, your machine returns to the setting you chose in  
step 2, above.  
Duration, in minutes and seconds  
Length, in number of pages  
Result of the call — Either “OK” or an error code (see pages 3.9–3.11)  
2.30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Quick Memory transmission  
Using Quick Memory transmission can save you time over standard  
memory transmissions.  
Polling  
Polling allows someone to fax a document to you without having to make the call or  
pay for it. There are several kinds of polling:  
For a normal memory transmission, your fax: (1) scans your entire document into  
memory, (2) dials the other fax machine, then (3) transmits the document.  
•
•
Regular polling — Your fax retrieves a document from a remote fax machine.  
F-Code polling — Your fax retrieves a document stored as a file in the remote fax  
machine. To do this, you must be communicating with another F-code-compatible  
fax machine. For more information on F-Code polling, see “F-Code communication,”  
pages 2.46–2.47.  
But with Quick Memory transmission, your machine doesn’t wait to scan all pages  
into memory before dialing. After it scans the first page of your document, your  
machine dials the call. While dialing, connecting and transmitting, your fax  
machine continues to scan in the remaining pages of the document.  
•
Continuous polling — Your fax continuously retrieves a document from any  
remote fax machine at a designated time. For example, a hospital pharmacy can  
use this to check on orders waiting in fax machines throughout the hospital.  
You can set your fax to always use Quick Memory transmission as the default.  
Im p or ta n t: Your fax machine’s memory transmission feature must be turned on  
For polling to work, the remote machine must also be set up to be polled. See the  
remote machine’s operating instructions, if necessary.  
to use Quick Memory transmission (see page 1.18).  
To make Quick Memory transmission the default:  
Regular polling  
To set up your machine for regular polling:  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 7, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Quick Tx  
:On  
Make sure the document is inserted in the remote fax machine.  
Program/Enter  
1
2
Press COM-OP TIONS twice and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
2
Here, we’ve chosen Off.  
Enter Fax Number  
_
Quick Tx  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Enter the remote fax machine’s number by either pressing a one-touch key,  
entering a speed-dial number or using the numeric keypad.  
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
To perform the regular polling now, skip to step 8.  
To perform delayed regular polling, go on to step 5.  
4
Press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
5
Delayed  
Enter Time: 15/17:05  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time (use the 24-hour format)  
when your machine should perform the delayed regular polling.  
6
Press ENTER.  
7
8
Press START.  
When your machine polls for documents, it dials the number and, upon making con-  
tact with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other machine  
had placed the call.  
2.31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Continuous polling  
To set up your machine for continuous polling:  
To add additional fax numbers, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a  
comma then enter the number as in step 6. You can specify up to 30 numbers  
(and/or call groups) for continuous polling.  
7
8
Press COM-OP TIONS six times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows the  
current time:  
1
Press Start  
[03],9-5551204,S118,  
Cont Polling  
Start Time : 18:30  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.  
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press CANCEL to clear them.  
Press START.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time your machine should begin the con-  
tinuous polling. (Use the 24-hour format.) Here, we’ve set it for 7:00 AM.  
2
Cont Polling  
Start Time : 07:00  
When your machine polls for documents, it dials each number and, upon making  
contact with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other  
machine had placed the call. It will continue the process throughout the time period  
you selected in steps 2–5.  
Note: Press  
to move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right.  
When the start time is set, press ENTER to save it.The LCD shows:  
Note: When you want to end a continuous polling operation, you must delete it  
3
4
using the Review Commands feature (see page 2.18).  
Cont Polling  
End Time  
: 07:00  
Being polled  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time when your machine should finish  
the continuous polling. (Use the 24-hour format.)Here, we’ve set it for 3:00 PM.  
Not only can you poll, but you can also be polled. To set up a document for regular  
polling:  
Cont Polling  
If your fax machine is set for Tel Ready reception, press AUTO ANSWER to  
change it to the Auto Answer mode. The Auto Answer light will glow.  
1
End Time  
: 15:00  
Im p or ta n t: Your machine ca n ’t be polled if it’s in Tel Ready mode.  
Note: If you set the end time earlier than the start time, the polling operation  
will continue until the selected end time tomorrow.  
Insert the document.  
2
3
Note: Press  
to move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary. (Your fax machine will be trans-  
mitting to the machine doing the polling.)  
When the end time is set, press ENTER to save it.The LCD shows:  
5
6
Enter Fax Number  
_
Press /P ROGRAM, D, 1, ENTER.  
Your fax will scan the document into memory and return to standby mode.  
4
Note: If you want to return to the “Tel Ready” mode after the remote machine has  
polled your document, press AUTO ANSWER. The Auto Answer light on the  
control panel will turn off. Bu t d o th is on ly a fter you ’r e su r e th e r em ote  
m a ch in e h a s p olled you r d ocu m en t.  
Enter the remote fax machine’s number by either pressing a one-touch key,  
entering a speed-dial number or using the numeric keypad.  
If you are entering only one number for continuous polling, skip to step 8.  
To add additional fax numbers for this operation, go on to step 7.  
Once the remote fax machine polls the document you stored, your fax machine auto-  
matically erases the document from memory.  
2.32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Printing a stored polling document  
To print a document you’ve stored for regular polling without erasing it,  
press /P ROGRAM, D, 3, ENTER.  
OneLine + distinctive ring detection  
Many phone companies now offer their customers a special service which makes it  
possible for one phone line to do the work of two.  
With this service, you physically still have one phone line, but, electronically, you  
have two phone numbers. Your phone recognizes these different numbers and rings  
differently for each one.  
Erasing a stored polling document  
To erase a document you’ve stored for regular polling from your machine’s memory,  
press /P ROGRAM, D, 2, ENTER.  
For example, this makes it easy for you to have both a business number and a home  
number on one phone line, so you can answer one with “Jane Doe Consulting,” and  
the other with “Hello.” This works because you can tell the difference between the  
distinctive patterns of the two rings.  
Limiting polling access to your fax machine  
Your machine’s closed network setting (see page 2.60) works for polling, also. If a  
calling fax doesn’t “present” the proper passcode, it cannot poll from your fax.  
Your fax machine is also smart enough to tell the difference between two different  
numbers that are ringing it. All you have to do is set up your machine for the  
OneLine + distinctive ring detection (DRD) feature.  
Note: If you’re using the Block Junk Fax feature (see pages 2.60–2.61), even  
incoming calls which meet the passcode test must come from phone  
numbers you’ve approved.  
In order to use OneLine + DRD, your phone company must set up your distinctive  
ring service. When it does, it will assign a ring pattern. For example, the standard  
telephone ring is 2 seconds “on” (ringing) and 4 seconds “off” (silent), after which it  
repeats itself.  
Your fax has eight possible distinctive ring patterns for use with OneLine + DRD.  
One of them should work with your phone company’s DRD service. This chart lists  
the patterns:  
Pa tter n  
On e com p lete r in g p a tter n (secon d s)  
0.8 on, 0.4 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off  
0.3 on, 0.2 off, 1.0 on, 0.2 off, 0.3 on, 4.0 off  
1.0 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.5 off  
0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.0 off  
0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.0 off  
0.4 on, 0.6 off, 0.4 on, 4.6 off  
1.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.5 off  
For example: pattern  
C
is 0.3 seconds ringing, 0.2 seconds silent, 1 second ringing,  
0.2 seconds silent, 0.3 seconds ringing and 4 seconds silent. Then it goes back to the  
first 0.3-second ring and starts over.  
2.33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
To use DRD on your fax machine:  
Call request  
Contact your phone company to make sure it has set up DRD service for you. If  
possible, also find out which distinctive ring pattern the phone company has  
assigned you.  
You can send or receive a fax message and have a regular phone conversation on the  
same call (although, not at the same time). This is called a call request. It doesn’t  
matter whether you’re sending the fax or receiving it. You may fax first and then  
talk, or talk first and then fax.  
1
2
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 2, 0, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, the remote fax machine must have a similar  
call-request capability. Your machine must also have an optional  
handset attached.  
DRD  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
Note: Communicating this way disables “V.34” mode, causing the fax machine to  
handle the call in normal ITU-T Group 3 fashion. See page 3.20 for more  
information.  
3
Here, we’ve chosen On.  
DRD  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Faxing/receiving first, then talking  
Press ENTER.  
To send or receive a fax first and then talk:  
4
5
While your fax machine is sending or receiving the fax, press MONITOR/CALL.  
Ring Pattern  
:A  
1
2
Program/Enter  
At the remote fax machine, the ringer will sound after that machine receives  
each page.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the pattern you want appears.  
Here, we’ve chosen “C”.  
If someone answers at the remote fax machine, your fax machine will ring  
several times. If so, pick up the optional handset. In a few seconds, the line  
will open and you can begin your conversation.  
3
Ring Pattern  
:C  
Program/Enter  
Talking first, then sending a fax  
To talk first and then send a fax:  
Press ENTER to set your machine to the displayed ring pattern.  
6
Im p or ta n t: If your telephone company gives you only very general ring pattern  
specifications, or if you encounter a problem while using your  
machine’s DRD feature, p lea se tr y ALL of th e listed r in g p a tter n s.  
If you still have a problem after trying a ll of the patterns, please call  
the Muratec Customer Support Center. (From the United States, call  
972-364-3350. For the number to call from Canada, check the  
documentation found inside your fax machine’s box).  
When you’ve finished your phone conversation, don’t hang up.  
1
2
3
4
Insert the document you want to fax.  
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up  
his/her handset. Don’t hang up you r handset yet!  
Im p or ta n t: With your machine set for using DRD, it won’t respond to any ring pat-  
tern other than the one you selected above. To reset the fax so it will  
respond once again to normal rings, repeat steps 2–4, above — except,  
in step 3, toggle it to “Off.” Your fax will now respond normally.  
When you hear fax tones, press START and hang up your fax machine’s  
optional handset. Your fax machine will send the document.  
5
2.34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Talking first, then receiving a fax  
To talk first and then receive a fax:  
Press ENTER.  
7
Enter Fax Number  
_
When you’ve finished your phone conversation, don’t hang up.  
1
2
From here, continue sending the document using whatever type of transmission you  
need (broadcast, group dial, etc.). When the remote fax machine prints the  
document, a note on the right side of your TTI will indicate the number of the page  
— such as “P.02” for page two.  
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up  
his/her handset. Don’t hang up your handset yet!  
When you hear fax tones, press START and hang up your machine’s optional  
handset. Your machine will receive the document and print it out.  
3
Responding to a call request  
If someone requests a call from you during a fax communication, you’ll hear a long  
ring after the receiving machine has received each page. To answer the call request:  
Transferring documents (Fax Forward)  
This feature tells your fax machine to receive documents and then transfer them  
automatically to another fax machine. You can set the time period for which the fax  
machine will continue this process.  
Lift your machine’s optional handset, and listen for a few seconds. You may  
hear a brief series of fax tones.  
1
Note: Fax Forward will not transfer these types of received documents:  
Shortly, the line will open and the person at the other end of the line will  
answer. You and the other person now can have a normal phone conversation.  
•
•
•
•
SecureMail reception  
Polling reception  
2
Relay broadcast reception  
F-Code reception  
Numbering pages  
Just before sending a fax, you can set your fax machine to number each page. This  
will help the person receiving the fax to keep track of all the pages.  
Create the transfer pattern  
Note: You can create up to five transfer patterns.  
To set up page numbering:  
To set up transfer pattern:  
Count the number of pages in your document.  
1
2
3
4
Press /P ROGRAM,  
Q
,
ENTER.  
1
Insert the document.  
Q1 Enter Fax Forward  
Program/Enter  
Adjust the resolution and contrast, if necessary.  
If you set up a transfer pattern at your first time, skip to step 4.  
If you have already set up any transfer pattern, proceed to step 3.  
If you want to toggle between a manual transmission or memory  
transmission, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
2
3
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
L
,
ENTER. The LCD shows:  
5
Select Fax Forward #  
1:1234  
Enter # Of Pages  
(01-50):01  
Press  
appears.  
or /P ROGRAM until the number you want to set up or change  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of pages in your document. If  
there are fewer than 10 pages, enter a leading zero and then the number (For  
example: 04 for four pages).  
6
2.35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time. The machine asks time  
period that the machine will transfer documents.  
How to en ter th e d a y a n d tim e:  
4
5
9
1:Forwarding Number  
_
•
To enter the day, press following numeric keypad.  
Enter the fax number for the remote fax to which you want documents to be  
transferred. Use either a one-touch number, a speed-dial number, a call group  
or regular number dialed from the numeric keypad.  
Numeric keypad 0:  
Numeric keypad 1:  
Numeric keypad 2:  
Numeric keypad 3:  
Numeric keypad 4:  
Numeric keypad 5:  
Numeric keypad 6:  
Sunday  
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
If you are entering only one number for transferring, skip to step 7.  
To add any additional fax numbers for this operation, proceed to step 6.  
To add more fax numbers, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a  
comma, then enter the number as described in step 3.  
You can specify up to 201 numbers for transferring.  
6
Saturday  
•
•
To enter the time, using numeric keypad.  
Note: You can enter only 1 location by using numeric keypad.  
If you do not wish to set up the day and time, enter *.  
1:Forwarding Number  
14567,[01],S002,G3_  
Note: To change only one digit, press  
/P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that digit. Then, enter the correct  
digit.  
to move the cursor leftward, or  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.  
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press CANCEL to clear them.  
Example 1: When you set the start transferring time for 7:00 at Tuesday,  
and set the end transferring time for 19:00 at Friday, press 2 0 7 0 0 5 1 9 0 0,  
which results in:  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD will show:  
7
8
1:Fax Forward :On  
Program/Enter  
1:Enter Time  
Tue 07:00--Fri 19:00  
If you want to set to off, press  
appears.  
or /program until the mode you want  
Example 2: When you set the start transferring time for 7:00 and set the end  
transferring time for 19:00 everyday, press * 0 7 0 0 * 1 9 0 0, which results  
in:  
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:  
1:Enter Time  
* 07:00-- * 19:00  
Example 3: When you set the start day for Tuesday, and set the end day for  
Friday, press 2 * * * * 5 * * * *, which results in:  
Start transferring  
day and time  
End transferring  
day and time  
1:Enter Time  
Tue **:**--Fri **:**  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD will show:  
10  
1:Auto Print :Off  
Program/Enter  
2.36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Automatic printing determines whether the machine will print a document  
automatically upon receiving it:  
On :  
A copy of every document received and transferred is printed at your  
machine.  
Off:  
Received and transferred documents are not printed at your machine.  
Note: If the security reception (pages 2.56–2.57) is activating, the machine  
dose not print received document regardless of this setting.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
11  
To setup or modify another transfer pattern, repeat steps 2-7. To finish, press STOP  
.
Printing a list of your transfer patterns  
You can easily print a list of your transfer patterns. The list includes each pattern’s  
identifier number, remote fax’s number where you want documents to be trans-  
ferred, On/Off setting, time period and Auto print setting.  
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, Q, 2, ENTER.  
The power of QuadAccess®  
Your fax machine’s QuadAccess feature sharply reduces the time you might spend  
waiting for the machine to finish its work. QuadAccess is a more powerful version of  
what already is a pretty powerful feature, called dual access. While a fax with normal  
dual access allows you to do two things at once, QuadAccess allows you to do four  
operations at once. For example, even if the machine is (1) printing a copy, (2) trans-  
mitting from memory and (3) scanning documents for a different memory  
transmission, you can still (4) program the machine.  
2.37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
F-Code communication  
F-Code: an introduction  
Creating or modifying an F-Code box  
The ITU-T, the United Nations agency that standardizes international telecommuni-  
cations, has created a fax industry standard for using sub-addressing and  
password-based communication. One name for this standard is F-Code, and that’s  
what we’ll call it in these instructions and on your machine’s display.  
Choosing the F-Code box type  
Before you set up an F-Code box, first decide how your callers will use it — as a  
bulletin box, a security box or a relay box.  
•
Bu lletin box — Stores documents that people in remote locations retrieve by  
polling the box. For example, your sales branches could call in at any time to get  
a printout of your latest prices that you’ve stored in a bulletin box.  
How sub-addressing works  
To help understand sub-addressing, think about how someone in a large company  
receives mail. For example, mail for the Accounting department is first delivered to  
the company’s main mailroom. Then the mailroom routes the mail to Accounting.  
A bulletin box stores both scanned and retrieved documents, and it holds its  
contents indefinitely (as long as the unit has AC power).  
That’s the idea behind sub-addressing. Your fax and another F-Code-compatible fax  
exchange special signals to indicate just where the fax really should go. It’s as if the  
sending fax is saying, “Deliver this to room 48,” and the receiving fax does just that.  
•
•
Secu r ity box — Receives and stores F-Code secure communications.  
Rela y box — Receives documents, then relays them to other machines. The  
machine that relays the document is called a “hub”. Your fax machine can either  
send to a hub or it can be a hub.  
Your machine has up to 50 mailboxes for these special deliveries. When someone  
sends an F-Code fax to you, your machine receives it into one of those 50 mailboxes  
— whichever box the sender chooses.  
4 elements of an F-Code box  
Each F-Code box has the following four elements:  
(1) F-Code box number (01-50)  
Sending F-Code securely  
For greater security, you can set up a password with each F-Code sub-address,  
which lets you use secure transmission, polling and relay broadcasting when com-  
municating with any other F-Code compatible fax machine.  
(2) F-Code box name (up to 16 characters)  
(3) F-Code sub-address (up to 20 characters - can include numbers and the * and #  
characters only)  
Guidelines for using F-Code  
(4) I.D. Code (4 digits)  
(1) To use ITU-T sub-addressing, you must create F-Code boxes in your machine  
You will choose the information for each of these elements, and enter it into your  
machine. The following steps will walk you through entering and changing that  
information.  
(2) Your machine holds up to 50 of these boxes  
(3) Your machine stores up to 30 documents into each F-Code box (each document  
can include one or more pages)  
2.38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Enter the name the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart.  
To create or modify an F-Code box:  
8
An F-Code box’s name can be up to 16 characters in length.  
Keep pen and paper with you as you follow these steps. As you decide on a  
sub-address and enter it into your machine, write it down. Remember to: (1)  
write down which box goes with which sub-address, (2) write down any pass-  
1
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters  
through the one-touch keys.  
words or  
I
.
D. codes you enter, (3) keep these printed records in a safe place.  
, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a  
name entered for F-Code box 01, the LCD shows:  
03:Box Name;Upper  
_
Press /P ROGRAM,  
P
2
3
The word “Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only upper-  
Select F-Code Box  
01:No Number Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
01:NY Branch Office  
or  
case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
To enter a lower-case letter, press ALP HABET. The display changes to:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code  
box you want to create or modify. Here, we’ve entered 0, 3 and see either:  
03:Box Name;Lower  
_
Select F-Code Box  
03:No Number Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
or  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters. For exam-  
ple, pressing R, will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
If want to select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD,  
use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit F-Code box number now.  
4
5
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALP HABET.  
Use the one-touch keypad to enter spaces, punctuation and symbols.  
Press ENTER. What you do next depends on whether you’re creating or  
modifying the F-Code box:  
If creating — skip to step 7.  
You can also use the CODE function to enter characters. Please review the  
explanation on page 2.2.  
If modifying — the LCD asks you to enter the proper I.D. code. The LCD shows:  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change just one character in the name, press  
left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the  
character. Then re-enter the name correctly.  
to move the cursor  
03:Set F-Code Box  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the 4-digit  
address and not the ITU-T password) and then press ENTER.  
I
.
D. code (not the ITU-T sub-  
Press ENTER to save the box’s name and continue. The LCD shows:  
6
7
9
03:Sub-Address No.  
_
03:Sub-Address No.  
123456_  
Note: If you enter an invalid D. code, the fax machine rejects the attempt  
and aborts this operation.  
The machine is now asking you to name this F-Code box. The LCD shows:  
I.  
or  
The fax machine now asks for this F-Code box’s sub-address. This is the  
numerical identifier you must enter in order to communicate with any remote  
F-Code compatible fax.  
03:Box Name;Upper  
_
03:Box Name;Upper  
Muratec America_  
or  
If you do not want to change an existing sub-address, skip to step 11.  
If you do not want to enter or change this F-Code box’s name, skip to step 9.  
If you do want to enter or change this F-Code box’s name, go on to step 8.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub-address to identify this F-Code box.  
The sub-address can be up to 20 characters in length and include any  
combination of numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-  
numeric characters).  
10  
03:Sub-Address No.  
654321_  
2.39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Note: No other F-Code box in this machine can have the same sub-address  
Press ENTER to save the password. The LCD now shows:  
as the one you enter here.  
14  
15  
Box Type :Bulletin  
Program/Enter  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change just one number, press  
to move the cursor left, or  
/P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the character.  
Then re-enter the number correctly.  
The fax machine is asking which box type you want to assign to this box —  
bulletin, security or relay.  
Press ENTER to save the sub-address.  
11  
12  
13  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the type of box you want appears.  
Note: If you entered a sub-address already being used by another F-Code  
Press ENTER.  
box, the machine beeps and briefly displays:  
If you chose Bulletin, go on to step 16.  
If you chose Security, skip to step 17.  
If you chose Relay, skip to step 20.  
03:Enter Sub-Address  
Sub-Address In Use  
The machine now returns you to step 10. Please enter a different  
number for your F-Code box’s sub-address.  
If you ch ose Bu lletin :  
The bulletin box has four additional settings:  
16  
Next, the machine asks for your F-Code box’s password. This is the password  
for ITU-T-compatible F-Code fax transactions. The LCD shows:  
•
•
•
•
Reception protection (“Rx Protect” on the LCD)  
Automatic printing of received documents (“Auto Print”)  
Overwriting documents (“Overwrite Doc.”)  
03:Password  
_
03:Password  
123456789*#_  
or  
Erasure of transmitted documents (“Erase Tx Doc.”)  
Note: You don’t need to have a password for the F-Code box. However, using  
Rx P r otect — Reception protection tells this box if it’s okay to receive  
documents from remote locations. Callers can then poll these documents.  
a password will make your F-Code communication much more secure.  
If you do not want to enter or change this box’s password, skip to step 14.  
Rx Protect  
:Off  
Use the numeric keypad to enter this box’s ITU-T-compatible password. This  
password can be up to 20 characters in length and include any combination of  
numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-numerical characters).  
Here, we’ve entered 135*7#9.  
Program/Enter  
On: Open this box to receive documents from callers.  
Off: Do not open this box to receive documents from callers.  
03:Password  
135*7#9_  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.  
Au to P r in t — Automatic printing of received documents tells the fax machine  
if it should print a document automatically upon receiving it into this box.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
To change just one character in the password, press  
to move the  
cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase the  
character. Then re-enter the password correctly.  
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection (Rx pro-  
tect) setting is set to off (see above).  
Note: You cannot change the type of an existing F-Code box. If you’re modi-  
fying an existing F-Code box and want to change the box type, you  
first must erase the old box, then create a new one.  
Auto Print  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
On: Print the document automatically when the box receives it.  
Off: Print the document manually, when you want to print it.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.  
2.40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Use the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit number indicating how many  
days (00-31), you want your fax machine to keep received documents in this  
F-Code box. Here, we’ve entered 09, for nine days:  
Over wr ite Doc — Overwriting documents tells your machine if it should  
overwrite (erase) existing documents when it receives a new one.  
18  
19  
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection setting is  
set to off (see Rx Protect on page 2.40).  
F-Code Doc Hold Time  
Hold Time (00-31):09  
Overwrite Doc. :Off  
Program/Enter  
Note: Your fax machine can store incoming documents in F-Code boxes (up  
to 30 documents) as long as 31 days, after which it automatically  
erases the documents. But if your machine has plenty of memory, you  
may want to override the 31-day limit in order to keep the documents  
indefinitely. If so, enter 00. If you choose this, you will have to delete  
documents manually. (You may want to contact your authorized  
Muratec dealer regarding optional memory expansion.)  
On: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will erase  
any documents currently stored in it.  
Off: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will not  
erase the documents stored in it. Your machine can store up to 30  
documents (each document can include one or more pages) in each box.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
Press ENTER to save the settings. Skip to step 24.  
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.  
Er a se Tx Doc — Erasure of transmitted documents tells your machine if it  
should erase a document from the box after a caller retrieves (polls) the  
document.  
If you ch ose Rela y:  
The machine asks for the fax number for the remote unit.  
The LCD shows:  
20  
Erase Tx Doc. :Off  
Program/Enter  
Enter Relay Number  
_
On: Your machine erases the document from the box as soon as it sends it. If  
you choose “On”, this box can be polled only once per document.  
Off: Your machine does not erase a document from the box when it’s polled.  
As long as your machine holds AC power and you do not erase the docu-  
ment from the box, the document is available indefinitely for polling.  
Enter the fax number using a one-touch key, a speed-dial number or a call  
group number. You cannot use the numeric keypad to enter these numbers.  
21  
To add each fax number, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a  
comma, then enter the number. You can specify up to 200 numbers for a  
remote unit.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
Press ENTER to save the setting. Then skip to step 24.  
Enter Relay Number  
S001,G12_  
If you ch ose Secu r ity:  
The machine asks how long you want to keep a document stored in your  
machine’s F-Code box. The LCD shows:  
Press ENTER to save the settings. The LCD shows:  
17  
22  
Select TTI :Sender  
Program/Enter  
F-Code Doc Hold Time  
Hold Time (00-31):00  
The machine asks for the type of TTI you want to appear on the faxes that are  
relayed to other callers.  
•
•
•
Sen d er — Relay the document with sender unit’s TTI (don’t send your TTI).  
Both — Relay the document with both the sender unit’s TTI and your TTI.  
You r s — Relay the document with your TTI instead of the sender unit’s.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
2.41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press ENTER to save the settings. The LCD shows:  
Printing a list of documents stored in  
your F-Code boxes  
The list of documents stored in your machine’s F-Code boxes includes:  
23  
Auto Print  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
(1) Each box’s identifier number  
(2) Box name (if any)  
(3) Box type  
On: Print the document automatically when it’s received.  
Off: The machine does not print it, but only relays it to the other machine.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
(4) Each file number (or document number) that is stored  
Then press ENTER to save the settings and go on to step 24.  
To print a list of documents stored in F-Code boxes, press /P ROGRAM, , 3, ENTER.  
P
The machine asks for your F-Code box’s four-digit security  
I.D. code. This is  
24  
the D. code for the box’s security, which you use to (1) print a document any  
I
.
remote F-Code-compatible fax sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before  
you can make any changes to this F-Code box.  
Using a bulletin box  
03:Set F-Code Box  
Enter I.D. Code:0000  
Storing a document  
Your fax machine can store up to 30 documents in each bulletin box.  
If you do not want to change the  
Decide on a four-digit D. code (0001-9999) for this F-Code box.  
Wr ite it d ow n , and put it in a safe place.  
Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000 as an D. code.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit .D. code for this F-Code box.  
I.D. code, skip to step 27.  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
I
.
•
•
The bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.  
You must know the bulletin box’s two-digit number (01-50) and four-digit  
D. code. (See “Creating or Modifying an F-Code box,” pages 2.38–2.42, if  
necessary.)  
25  
26  
27  
I
.
I
.
I
To store a document in a bulletin box for polling.  
Im p or ta n t: After completing this step, you must know this code to print  
documents sent to this F-Code box. Be sure to write it down.  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.  
1
2
Press ENTER to save the F-Code box information.  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 7, ENTER The LCD shows:  
P
To create or modify another F-Code box, repeat steps 3-27.  
Select F-Code Box  
Select F-Code Box  
To finish, press STOP  
.
or  
01:No Number Stored  
01:Murata Machinery  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of  
the F-Code box where you want to store the document.  
Here, we’ve entered 0, 3:  
3
Printing a list of F-Code boxes  
The list of F-Code boxes includes:  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
(1) Each box’s identifier number  
(2) Box name (if any)  
(3) Sub-address  
If you want to use a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the  
LCD, enter the box number now.  
(4) Password  
(5) Box type  
(6) Each box’s settings  
4
5
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
To print a list of your F-Code boxes, press /P ROGRAM, , 2, ENTER.  
P
03:Set F-Code Doc.  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
2.42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit I.D. code.  
Here, we’ve entered 2345:  
6
7
2
bulletin box that stores the document you want to print. We’ve entered 03:  
03:Set F-Code Doc.  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
Press ENTER.  
If you’ve entered an incorrect  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
3
4
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt  
03:Print F-Code Doc.  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
and returns to standby mode.  
If you’ve entered the correct  
I.D. code, the display shows:  
Overwrite Doc. :Off  
Program/Enter  
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit I.D. code.  
Here we’ve entered 2345:  
03:Print F-Code Doc.  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
If you choose:  
On: Your bulletin box erases the currently stored document when a new  
document is stored in it  
Off: Your bulletin box keeps both the currently stored document and the new  
document, up to 30 documents in each box.  
Press ENTER.  
If you’ve entered an incorrect  
5
6
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt  
and aborts this operation.  
If you’ve entered the correct  
I.D. code, the display shows:  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
8
9
03:Print F-Code Doc.  
File No.  
Press ENTER to save the setting. Your machine starts scanning the document  
into the selected bulletin box:  
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the file number (1-30) of the document you  
want to print. Here we’ve entered 3.  
F-Code Doc. File: 1  
A4  
Mem 100%  
03:Print F-Code Doc.  
Im p or ta n t: The file number (shown above as 1) tells you how many docu-  
ments are in this bulletin box. Your machine numbers files 1-30.  
You need to know the file’s number to erase or print it.  
File No.  
3_  
Note: If you want to print all documents stored in the bulletin box, simply  
enter 0 (zero).  
Printing a document stored in a bulletin box  
You can print a document stored in your machine’s F-Code bulletin boxes without  
erasing the document from memory.  
Press ENTER.  
7
Your fax machine prints the chosen document(s), then returns to standby  
mode.  
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly  
To print a stored document:  
displays the following before returning to standby mode:  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 4, ENTER The LCD shows:  
P
1
03:Print F-Code Doc.  
No Document Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
01:Murata Machinery  
2.43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Erasing a document stored in a bulletin box  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
7
8
To erase a stored document:  
03:Erase F-Code Doc.  
Check  
Enter/Stop  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 6, ENTER The LCD shows:  
P
1
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any document in the bulletin box,  
Select F-Code Box  
01:Murata Machinery  
press STOP . The machine will return to standby mode.  
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code  
bulletin box that stores the document you want to erase. We’ve entered 03:  
displays the following and then returns to standby mode:  
2
03:Erase F-Code Doc.  
No Document Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
Press ENTER to erase the document(s) and to return to standby mode.  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
3
Erase F-Code Doc.  
** Complete **  
03:Erase F-Code Doc.  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly  
displays the following before returning to step 2:  
Using a security box  
Select F-Code Box  
No Document Stored  
Printing a document you receive  
When your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to an F-Code  
security box, your machine prints a message to let you know. The message lists: (1)  
the F-Code box number that received the document, (2) the Box name, (3) the  
remote machine’s TTI (if any), and (4) the file numbers stored in the F-Code box.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit I.D. code.  
Here we’ve entered 2345:  
4
5
03:Erase F-Code Doc.  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
You then have a certain number of days (see step 17 and 18 on page 2.41) in which  
to print out the document before your machine automatically erases it.  
Press ENTER.  
If you’ve entered an incorrect  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt  
•
•
You must know the F-Code security box’s two-digit number.  
You must know the F-Code security box’s four-digit D. code.  
and aborts this operation.  
If you’ve entered the correct  
I
.
I.D. code, the display shows:  
To print a received message:  
, 4, ENTER The LCD shows:  
03:Erase F-Code Doc.  
File No.  
_
Press /P ROGRAM,  
P
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the file number (1-30) of the document you  
want to erase. Here we’ve entered 3.  
Select F-Code Box  
01:Murata Machinery  
6
03:Erase F-Code Doc.  
File No.  
3_  
Note: If you want to erase all documents stored in the bulletin box, enter 0  
(zero).  
2.44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Erasing an empty F-Code box  
An F-Code box must be empty in order to erase it. (If you select an F-Code box in  
these steps which is not empty, the machine beeps. If this happens, print all docu-  
ments in that box before erasing it.)  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code  
security box that holds the documents you want to print. We’ve entered 03:  
2
3
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
To erase an empty F-Code box:  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 5, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
P
1
03:Print F-Code Doc.  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
Select F-Code Box  
Select F-Code Box  
or  
01:No Number Stored  
01:Murata Machinery  
Note: If the F-Code security box is not storing any documents, the machine  
briefly displays the following before returning to step 2:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of  
the F-Code box you want to erase. Here, we’ve entered 0, 3 and see:  
2
03:Print F-Code Doc.  
No Document Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit I.D. code.  
4
5
Here we’ve entered 2345:  
If you want to erase a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the  
LCD, enter the box number now.  
3
4
03:Print F-Code Doc.  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
Press ENTER. If the F-Code box is empty, the LCD shows:  
03:Erase F-Code Box  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
Press ENTER.  
•
If you’ve entered the correct  
ments in the F-Code security box and then erases them.  
If you’ve entered an incorrect D. code, your fax machine aborts the opera-  
tion and returns to standby mode.  
I.D. code, your fax machine prints all docu-  
Im p or ta n t: If you select an F-Code box which is not empty, the machine  
•
I
.
beeps and, before returning to step 3, briefly displays:  
Select F-Code Box  
Box In Use  
Using a relay box  
Once your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to one of its F-  
Code relay boxes, it sends it to the other fax machines that you’ve set up on your  
relay box. (See “Creating or Modifying an F-Code box”, page 2.38–2.42)  
Print any documents received in the F-Code box, then repeat  
this procedure from the beginning to erase the box.  
Otherwise, select another F-Code box.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit I.D. code.  
Here, we’ve entered 2345:  
5
If you set the Auto print mode to on when you created the relay box, your machine  
will print the received document, then relay it to the other machine. Otherwise,  
your machine will only relay it to the other machines, not print it. See “If you chose  
Relay,” pages 2.41–2.42 for more details on this setting.  
03:Erase F-Code Box  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
Also, you can send (relay broadcast initiation) the document to another hub  
machine’s F-Code box and get that machine to relay it to others. See “F-Code trans-  
mission” on page 2.46 for more detail.  
The hub performs a relay broadcast, and the machine which sends the original doc-  
ument to the hub has performed a relay broadcast initiation.  
2.45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press ENTER.  
If you want to toggle between manual transmission and memory transmis-  
sion, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
6
3
4
If you’ve entered an incorrect  
and returns to standby mode.  
If you’ve entered the correct  
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt  
Press COM-OP TIONS four times and then press ENTER.  
I.D. code, the display shows:  
Enter Sub-Address  
_
03:Erase F-Code Box  
Check Program/Enter  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address in the remote  
machine. In this example, we’ve entered 123456.  
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the F-Code box you’ve selected,  
5
press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.  
Enter Sub-Address  
123456_  
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any F-Code box, press STOP  
.
The machine returns to standby mode.  
Press ENTER to erase the F-Code box.  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase the character, then  
7
enter the correct number.  
Erase F-Code Box  
** Complete **  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
6
Enter Password  
_
To erase another F-Code box, repeat steps 2-7.  
To finish, press STOP  
.
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 8.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password. In this example, we’ve  
entered 654321.  
7
8
F-Code transmission and polling  
With F-Code, your machine can send secure transmissions, perform relay broadcast  
initiations and even poll from other ITU-T-equipped machines, regardless of manu-  
facturer.  
Enter Password  
654321_  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
You can do this two ways:  
•
•
Using the programmable one-touch key (see pages 2.52-2.54)  
Enter Fax Number  
_
Entering the ITU-T sub-address and password directly, which is what we’ll  
describe here.  
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-  
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do n ot press START.  
9
Note: For F-Code communication to work, three things must be true:  
•
•
The remote fax machine must support ITU-T sub-addressing  
What you do now depends on when you want the transmission to begin.  
10  
The remote fax must have a mailbox with an ITU-T sub-address created  
on it  
•
•
To have it begin now, skip to step 13.  
To delay it, go on to step 11.  
•
You must know the ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for the  
remote machine’s mailbox  
Press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
11  
12  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 15/17:05  
F-Code transmission  
Insert the document.  
1
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the transmission  
should begin, then press ENTER.  
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.  
2.46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press START.  
Press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
13  
8
Delayed  
Enter Time: 15/17:05  
If in step 10 you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine begins dialing.  
If you chose a delayed command, the machine shows “Reserved” on the LCD, indicat-  
ing that it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the polling should  
begin, then press ENTER.  
9
F-Code polling  
Press START.  
10  
Press COM-OP TIONS five times and then press ENTER.  
1
If in step 7 you chose an immediate polling, your fax machine begins dialing. If you  
chose a delayed command, the machine shows “Reserved” on the LCD, indicating that  
it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.  
Enter Sub-Address  
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address.  
In this example, we’ve entered 123456.  
2
Enter Sub-Address  
123456_  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase the character, then  
enter the correct number.  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
3
Enter Password  
_
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 5.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password. In this example, we’ve  
entered 654321.  
4
Enter Password  
654321_  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
5
Enter Fax Number  
_
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-  
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do n ot press START.  
6
What you do now depends upon when you want the polling to begin.  
7
•
•
To have it begin now, skip to step 10.  
To delay it, go on to step 8.  
2.47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Programmable one-touch keys  
Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command: If your previous com-  
mand for this key was a for a delayed operation, and you want to keep  
this key programmed for a delayed operation, use these instructions  
to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a completely  
different operation (to Broadcast, for example), then you must first  
erase the stored command before programming the new one.  
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys  
In order to complete some operations on your machine, you may have to follow sev-  
eral steps and press several different buttons. But programming your machine’s  
one-touch keys (73–76) can reduce those many steps to a simple press of a key.  
You can “teach” the one-touch keys to carry out any of the following operations:  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than what  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
4
Com mu n ica tion s fu n ction s:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Delayed transmission (explained on pages 2.17–2.19)  
Broadcasting (pages 2.16)  
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:  
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
_
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5558743_  
Regular polling (not continuous) (pages 2.31–2.32)  
Batch transmission (pages 2.20–2.23)  
F-Code transmission (pages 2.46–2.47)  
F-Code polling (page 2.47)  
or  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can  
be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5550629_  
Programming a delayed transmission  
To program a delayed transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable  
those 20, press  
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.  
1
one-touch number available:  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Select Program No.  
73:No Number Stored  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
If you want to change just one character in the number, press  
to  
move the cursor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to  
erase it. Then re-enter the number correctly.  
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 73 appears on the  
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 73.  
Now, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press COM-OP TIONS,  
ENTER. The LCD shows:  
6
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see pages 2.54–2.55.  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 75.  
2
Delayed  
Enter Time: 11/20:30  
Select Program No.  
75:No Number Stored  
2.48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press the key you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 75.  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
7
2
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
Select Program No.  
75:No Number Stored  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a broadcast / group  
transmission and you want to keep this key programmed for a broad-  
cast / group transmission, use these instructions to make changes. But  
if you want to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a  
delayed transmission, for example), then you first must erase the  
stored command before programming the new one.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one  
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and  
then the time the fax should perform the command:  
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
_
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5558743_  
or  
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
8
9
Use the numeric keypad to enter up to 230 fax numbers — you can use any  
combination of call groups, one-touch keys, speed-dial numbers and manually-  
dialed numbers.  
5
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP  
Your machine returns to standby mode.  
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.  
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.  
.
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Press BROADCAST to enter a comma between each number or call group.  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the la st number.  
To enter a speed-dial number, press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX and the number’s  
three-digit identifier.  
To enter a call group, press GROUP DIAL and the group’s identifier number.  
Programming a broadcast / group  
Programming a broadcast is very similar to programming a delayed transmission.  
But instead of sending to just one phone number, you set up multiple numbers for  
the transmission.  
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
G5,G7,[01],S006,9-55  
To program a broadcast / group into a programmable one-touch key:  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable  
one-touch number available:  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
1
those 20, press  
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
Select Program No.  
73:No Number Stored  
To change just one character in the number, press  
sor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.  
to move the cur-  
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 73 appears on the  
Then re-enter until the number correctly.  
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 73.  
If you want the broadcast to begin immediately every time you press the key,  
press ENTER and skip to step 9.  
If you want to delay the broadcast, press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.  
6
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see pages 2.54–2.55.  
2.49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 75.  
7
2
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
Select Program No.  
75:No Number Stored  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a polling transmission  
and you want to keep this key programmed for a polling transmission,  
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this  
key to a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for  
example), then you first must erase the stored command before pro-  
gramming the new one.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one  
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and  
then the time the fax should perform the command:  
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
_
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5558743_  
or  
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
8
9
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can  
be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP  
Your machine returns to standby mode.  
.
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5550696_  
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.  
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.  
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press  
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.  
Programming regular polling  
Note: You cannot program continuous polling into a programmable one-touch key.  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
For more information on continuous polling, see page 2.32.  
To change just one character in the number, press  
sor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.  
to move the cur-  
To program a regular polling operation into a programmable one-touch key:  
Then re-enter the number correctly.  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows an empty programmable one-  
touch number:  
1
Next, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press COM-OP TIONS  
twice and then press ENTER.  
6
7
Select Program No.  
73:No Number Stored  
If you want the polling to begin immediately every time you press the key,  
press ENTER and skip to step 10.  
If you want to delay the polling, press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.  
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 73 appears on the  
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 73.  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see pages 2.54–2.55.  
2.50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 75.  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
8
2
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
Select Program No.  
75:No Number Stored  
If your previous command for this key was for a different operation (for a  
delayed transmission, for example), you must er a se the stored command  
before you go to step 4 (refer to pages 2.54–2.55).  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
If this key was for a batch transmission, press ENTER, then skip to step 5.  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one  
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and  
then the time the fax should perform the command:  
3
4
Press ENTER, COM-OP TIONS three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit identifier for the batch box you  
want to assign to this one-touch key. Here, we’ve entered 5:  
5
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
9
10  
Batch Tx  
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP  
Your machine returns to standby mode.  
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.  
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.  
Enter Box No.  
5_  
.
Note: To change an identifier already entered, press CANCEL to erase it.  
Then re-enter the correct identifier.  
Press ENTER.  
6
7
Programming a batch transmission  
For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to standby mode.  
•
•
The batch box you’re using must exist on your fax machine.  
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.  
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.  
You must know the batch box’s identifier number (1–5).  
To program a batch transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable  
one-touch number available:  
1
Select Program No.  
73:No Number Stored  
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 73 appears on the  
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 73.  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to pages 2.54–2.55  
2.51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Programming an F-Code transmission  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can  
be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
•
You must know how the remote fax is using each F-Code box to which you’re  
transmitting — for example, as a security box or a relay box. Different fax manu-  
facturers may use slightly different terms, but the concepts are the same.  
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5558422_  
•
You must know the remote fax’s ITU-T sub-address and password for each box to  
which you want to transmit.  
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press  
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.  
To program an F-Code transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable  
1
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
one-touch number available:  
To change just one number, press  
to move the cursor left, or  
Select Program No.  
73:No Number Stored  
/P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it. Then re-enter  
the number correctly.  
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press COM-OP TIONS  
three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 73 appears on the  
6
7
8
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 73.  
Enter Sub-Address  
_
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see pages 2.54–2.55.  
Press the key you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 75.  
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-address for the box to which  
you want to send the document. Here, we’ve entered 123456:  
Select Program No.  
75:No Number Stored  
Enter Sub-Address  
123456_  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code transmis-  
sion and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code  
transmission, use these instructions to make changes. But if you want  
to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a delayed  
transmission, for example), then you first must erase the stored com-  
mand before programming the new one.  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Enter Password  
_
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one  
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
Note: If there isn’t a password for this box, press ENTER, then skip to step 12.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate ITU-T password for the box.  
Here, we’ve entered 654321:  
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:  
9
4
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
_
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5558743_  
Enter Password  
654321_  
or  
When finished, press ENTER.  
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the  
key, press ENTER and skip to step 13.  
If you want to delay the transmission, press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.  
10  
2.52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press the key you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected 75.  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
11  
2
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
Select Program No.  
75:No Number Stored  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code polling oper-  
ation and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code  
polling operation, use these instructions to make changes. But if you  
want to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a  
delayed transmission, for example), then you first must erase the  
stored command before programming the new one.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)  
To select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears  
on the LCD, press that key now.  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and  
then the time when the fax should perform the command:  
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
_
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5558743_  
or  
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
12  
13  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can  
be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to standby mode.  
75:Fax#/Com-Options  
9-5558422_  
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.  
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.  
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press  
to scroll to the left or /P ROGRAM to scroll to the right.  
Programming F-Code polling  
For this operation to work, three things must be true:  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Note: To erase characters, press CANCEL to erase to the left.  
•
The document which you’re polling must exist in the remote fax’s F-Code box (ITU-T  
standard sub-addressing/password box).  
To change just one character in the number, press  
sor left, or /P ROGRAM to move it right. Press CANCEL to erase it.  
Then re-enter the number correctly.  
to move the cur-  
•
You must know the remote fax’s ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for each  
box you want to poll.  
Now, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press COM-OP TIONS  
four times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
6
7
To program an F-Code polling operating into a programmable one-touch key:  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty programmable  
one-touch number available:  
Enter Sub-Address  
_
1
Select Program No.  
73:No Number Stored  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-address for the box you want  
to poll. Here, we’ve entered 123456:  
Note: If a programmable one-touch number other than 73 appears on the  
Enter Sub-Address  
123456_  
LCD, it means that you have already entered a number for 73.  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to pages 2.54–2.55.  
2.53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Fax dialing with programmable one-touch  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
8
9
To dial a fax call using a programmable one-touch number:  
Enter Password  
_
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
Note: If this box doesn’t have a password, press ENTER. Then skip to step 12.  
Make any necessary adjustments as usual.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T password for the box. Here, we’ve  
entered 654321:  
Press the programmable one-touch key in which you’ve stored the fax commu-  
nication command.  
Enter Password  
654321_  
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.  
Note: To review the details of each operation, review the instructions for that  
When finished, press ENTER.  
operation. See page 2.48 for a list of each operation and where to find it.  
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the  
key, press ENTER and skip to step 13.  
If you want to delay the transmission (perhaps to take advantage of lower  
phone rates), press COM-OP TIONS, ENTER.  
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCD shows:  
10  
11  
** Reserved **  
Jan 29 2000 17:17  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it,  
the LCD shows the number:  
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
9-1-972-555-4335  
A4 Normal  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Erasing a programmable one-touch key  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and  
then the time when the fax could perform the command:  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the first programmable one-  
touch number that has been programmed:  
1
Select Program No.  
73:Delayed  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
Note: If a one-touch number other than 73 appears, it means 73 is empty.  
Press the programmable one-touch key you want to erase. Here, we’ve  
selected 75:  
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
2
12  
13  
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not want to enter or change any other key’s programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to its usual standby mode.  
Select Program No.  
75:Polling  
If you do want to enter or change this key’s programming, go back to step 4.  
If you want to enter or change another key’s programming, go back to step 2.  
To erase a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears  
on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
2.54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
4
5
Erase P One-Touch  
Check Program/Enter  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the programmable one-  
touch key you’ve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will  
return to step 2.  
Press ENTER to erase the number.  
Erase P One-Touch  
** Complete **  
To erase another programmable one-touch key, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to  
return to standby mode.  
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys  
You fax machine can print a list of the commands you’ve stored in your programma-  
ble one-touch keys.  
The list includes:  
(1) each key’s one-touch number  
(2) the fax/telephone number  
(3) when the command should start  
(4) which command you’ve selected  
(5) if applicable, the selected call group(s) or F-Code box(es) you’ve stored in  
the key  
(6) the individual settings for each key  
To print a list of programmable one-touch keys, press /P ROGRAM, C, 3, ENTER.  
2.55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Security features  
Your machine has a number of security features to keep your private fax documents  
private, avoid unwanted outside communication and even protect against unautho-  
rized use of your machine.  
Security reception  
Security reception tells your machine to keep all received faxes in memory (but not  
print them). Then you can print them out later, at your convenience. For example,  
you could use this if you’re concerned about workers reading documents intended  
for your eyes only.  
These security features include: (1) security reception, (2) PIN mask,  
(3) security transmission, (4) closed network, (5) block junk fax, and  
(6) department codes.  
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-  
tion as described on left column. You must also know the passcode.  
The passcode  
Note: In the following instructions, your machine’s LCD shortens the word  
Transmission to Tx and the word Receive to Rx.  
Your machine has a passcode protection system which must be turned on in order to  
use the security features listed above.  
Activating security reception  
To set your machine’s passcode:  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
O
[the letter O, not a zero], 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001–9999) you want to use. Write it down,  
and put it in a safe place.  
1
1
Set Security Rx  
Enter Passcode :****  
Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000. This turns off passcode protection.  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 6, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
J
Use the numeric keypad to enter the protection passcode.  
Here, we’ve entered 6296:  
2
2
Protect Passcode  
Old Passcode :****  
Set Security Rx  
Enter Passcode :6296  
If you are creating a passcode, use the numeric keypad to enter 0000.  
If you are changing an existing passcode, enter the existing passcode.  
3
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
3
4
Press ENTER.  
4
5
Security Rx  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Enter the new four-digit passcode. Here, we’ve entered 6296:  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.  
Protect Passcode  
New Passcode :6296  
Here, we’ve chosen “On.”  
Security Rx  
:On  
Press ENTER to save the passcode.  
6
Program/Enter  
Note: Any time you want to turn off the passcode, change the passcode back to  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the machine’s current clock setting:  
0000 by repeating steps 2–6 and entering 0000 in step 5.  
5
Set Security Rx  
Enter Time:  
15:42  
2.56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Masking the PIN  
If you want security reception to begin now (and at this same time every day),  
skip to step 9.  
Otherwise, go on to step 7.  
6
7
To prevent unauthorized long-distance calls, some office telephone systems require  
you to enter a personal identification number (PIN) whenever you dial long distance.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time (use a 24-hour format) when secu-  
rity reception should begin every day. “Type over” the numbers displayed.  
Here, we’ve entered 17:35:  
Your fax’s PIN mask feature helps you keep that PIN number private. With the PIN  
mask activated, you can dial a fax number plus a PIN, but the PIN will not appear in  
a journal, error message printout, delayed command list or a TCR. The PIN may be up  
to eight characters in length. It also can include the * or # symbols, and it can be  
entered from the numeric keypad.  
Set Security Rx  
Enter Time:  
17:35  
There are three possible settings for the PIN mask:  
To change a digit, press  
Then enter the correct digit.  
to move to the left, or /P ROGRAM to move right.  
•
Off — Turns off the PIN mask feature. Any PIN you enter will appear on any dis-  
play or printout which shows the number you dial.  
•
•
Mode 1 — Each remote fax unit has a departmental PIN access code.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
9
Mode 2 — Each fax user has a departmental PIN access code.  
Printing from security reception / Turning off security reception  
When security reception is on, an incoming fax goes directly into your machine’s  
memory and the MEMORY RECEIVE light comes on. But the fax is not printed.  
Note: If you select Mode 1 and you will use a one-touch or speed-dial number, you  
must store the remote unit’s PIN access code within that number. However, if  
you select Mode 2, this isn’t necessary. (See “Autodialing while using the PIN  
mask,” next page for further details.)  
To retrieve the faxes received during this security reception (and to return your  
machine to normal reception until the next time):  
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission  
(see pages 2.20 – 2.23), you must store the PIN access code for the remote  
unit within the appropriate batch box.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
O
[the letter O, not a zero], 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
2
3
Print Mem Rx Doc.  
Enter Passcode: ****  
Activating the PIN mask  
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode. Here, we’ve entered 6296:  
tion as described on page 2.56. You must also know the passcode.  
Print Mem Rx Doc.  
Enter Passcode: 6296  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 5, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
J
1
2
Set PIN Mode  
Enter Passcode :****  
Press ENTER.  
•
If you’ve entered the correct passcode, your fax machine will print all docu-  
ments in its memory and then erase them. Then it will turn security  
reception off until the next time you’ve scheduled security reception.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, we’ve entered  
6296.  
Set PIN Mode  
Enter Passcode :6296  
•
If you’ve entered an incorrect code, your fax machine will refuse to print,  
and security reception remains on.  
Note: If you enter an invalid passcode, the machine’s security feature rejects  
the attempt and returns to standby mode.  
Press ENTER.  
3
PIN Mode  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
2.57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Im p or ta n t: While in PIN Mode 1, any autodialer numbers you use must include  
the PIN. This also applies to autodialer numbers used with batch  
transmission (see pages 2.20–2.23) or programmable one-touch keys  
(see pages 2.48–2.55).  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,  
4
we’ve chosen “Mode1.”  
PIN Mode  
:Mode1  
Program/Enter  
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission,  
you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within the appropri-  
ate batch box.  
Press ENTER.  
5
Autodialing while using the PIN mask  
If you chose “Mode 2” — as you autodial, load the code  
Note: The following instructions presume you understand how to set and use your  
In this mode, you don’t have to add the PIN to the autodialer setting. Instead, you  
enter the PIN manually each time you autodial:  
machine’s autodialer. If you need to review, see pages 2.7–2.15.  
If you chose “Mode 1” — the PIN goes in  
Dial the number as you normally would, using the autodialer. Here, we’ve  
pushed one-touch key A. The machine now asks for the PIN:  
1
In Mode 1, before autodialing a number for the first time, you must add the PIN to  
the stored one-touch key or speed-dial number. Here’s how:  
Enter PIN Number  
_
Begin by creating or changing an entry in the autodialer. See pages 2.7–2.15  
if necessary. While you’re setting this up, the machine asks you to enter the  
PIN. The LCD shows:  
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.  
2
Set PIN Number  
Enter Passcode :****  
Enter PIN Number  
1057_  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, we’ll use our  
sample passcode again.  
Press START. Your machine dials the number.  
2
3
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission  
(see pages 2.20–2.23), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit  
within the appropriate batch box.  
Set PIN Number  
Enter Passcode :6296  
Press ENTER. In our example, we’re setting speed-dial number 001:  
3
001:PIN Number  
_
Dialing from the numeric keypad while using the PIN mask  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired PIN, up to eight characters in  
length.  
If you’ve specified Mode 1 — use “star” power  
4
Enter the phone number, then press the * (“star”) key and enter the PIN.  
1
001:PIN Number  
1057_  
The PIN always goes last. For example, to dial 19725550911 with a PIN of  
“123456”, enter 19725550911*123456:  
Press Start  
19725550911*123456  
Press ENTER to save the PIN.  
5
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,  
indicates “Invalid Number” on the LCD and then returns to step 4.  
Now you may autodial the number as usual.  
Press START. The PIN disappears from the display, and your machine dials the  
desired phone number.  
2
2.58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,  
If you’ve specified Mode 2 — the machine guides you  
indicates “No PIN Number” on the LCD and then returns you to step 2.  
Enter the phone number as usual.  
1
Continue with the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (pages  
2.20–2.21).  
4
Press Start  
19725550911_  
Now you can perform batch transmission to this box while the PIN mask is activated.  
Press START. The LCD shows:  
2
Enter PIN Number  
_
Setting security transmission  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.  
3
Your fax’s security transmission feature provides extra assurance that your documents  
go where you’re sending them. When this feature is activated and your machine sends a  
fax, the machine compares the last four digits of the dialed number to the other unit’s  
Subscriber ID (the phone number at the top of that unit’s transmissions; see page 1.16).  
If these digits match, your call goes through. If they don’t, your machine disconnects the  
call and prints an error message telling you to check the condition of the remote unit.  
Enter PIN Number  
123456_  
Press START. Your machine dials the number.  
4
Before you activate this feature, consider:  
Performing batch transmission while using the PIN mask  
•
Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —  
Indeed, some machines don’t even have a Subscriber ID. So, with security trans-  
mission activated, your machine would disconnect its calls to such machines.  
Note: The following instructions presume you are familiar with how to set and use  
both your machine’s autodialer and its batch transmission feature. If you  
need to review, see pages 2.7–2.15 for more on the autodialer and/or pages  
2.20–2.23 for more on batch transmission.  
•
Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialer entry ends with a long-distance  
or other access codes, activating this feature prevents calls to that fax.  
Note: In the following instructions, your fax’s LCD abbreviates Transmission as Tx.  
If you’ve specified Mode 1 or Mode 2  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 0, ENTER. The LCD shows the current setting:  
Im p or ta n t: Any autodialer number you use with batch transmission must include  
the PIN. (To review how to include this information in an autodialer  
number, review the Mode 1 instructions under “Autodialing while  
using the PIN mask,” page 2.58.)  
1
Security Tx  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Before sending a batch transmission the first time, you must store the PIN within its  
batch box. Here’s how:  
Press  
we’ve chosen On.  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears. In this example,  
2
Follow the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (pages 2.20–2.21).  
The LCD asks for the fax number (here, we’re working with batch box 1):  
Security Tx  
:On  
1
Program/Enter  
1:Fax Number  
_
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
Enter an autodialer number, or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-  
ber, to which the batch transmission should go.  
2
Im p or ta n t: If you’re entering a number from the numeric keypad, enter the  
fax number, followed by the * (“star”) key and then the PIN.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
2.59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Setting for use with a closed network  
For maximum communications security, use a closed network. This limits your  
machine to only communicating with other Muratec fax machines which can “pre-  
sent” the proper passcode.  
Setting Block Junk Fax  
Your fax machine’s Block J unk Fax feature lets you bar the gates against unautho-  
rized incoming faxes (“junk fax”). But before you block junk fax, first understand  
how this feature works, to determine if it’s right for you. There are four possible set-  
tings for Block Junk Fax:  
Im p or ta n t: The passcode you use for closed network operation is n ot the same as  
•
•
Off — The feature isn’t activated.  
the protection passcode.  
Once your machine is set up for a closed network, your machine will disconnect calls  
coming in from fax machines other than Muratec fax machines.  
Mode1 — Your fax machine checks whether the last four digits of any phone  
number in your autodialer matches the last four digits of the remote fax’s sub-  
scriber ID (the phone number part of the TTI). If it doesn’t find a match, your  
machine disconnects the call.  
To set your fax machine’s closed network password:  
Decide on the four-digit closed network passcode (0001–9999) you want to use.  
Wr ite it down , and put it in a safe place.  
•
•
Mode2 — This mode rejects any call from a number whose last eight digits  
match any number in the blocked numbers list (explained later). Your machine  
can hold up to 30 blocked numbers.  
1
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 8, ENTER. The LCD shows the current code:  
J
2
3
4
Mode3 — This rejects numbers that are not in the autodialer and also rejects num-  
bers that are in the blocked numbers list. This lets you keep a number on your  
autodialer for transmission to it, while still blocking its incoming calls by putting  
it in the blocked numbers list.  
Set Passcode  
Passcode  
:0000  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired four-digit closed network passcode.  
But before you activate the Block Junk Fax feature, please consider:  
Set Passcode  
Passcode  
•
Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —  
With Block Junk Fax activated, your machine would reject faxes from these  
machines.  
:5627  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
•
Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialer entry ends with extra codes,  
such as long-distance codes, Block Junk Fax will block out calls from those faxes.  
Note: To turn off the closed network passcode and return to normal fax reception,  
change the code to 0000 by repeating steps 1–4 and entering 0000 in step 3.  
To set Block Junk Fax:  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:  
J
To set your fax machine to operate in a closed network:  
1
Block Junk Fax:Off  
Program/Enter  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 0, 9, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:  
1
Closed Net.  
:Off  
Program/Enter  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen Mode2.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the mode you want appears.  
2
Block Junk Fax:Mode2  
Program/Enter  
Here, we’ve chosen On.  
Closed Net.  
:On  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
What you do next depends on what you selected in step 1:  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
•
•
If you selected Off or Mode1, your machine returns to standby mode.  
If you selected either Mode2 or Mode3, go on to step 4.  
2.60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Clearing a number from the blocked numbers list  
To clear a number from the list:  
The LCD now asks if you want to enter a number:  
4
Set BlockJunk Dial  
Program/Enter  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 1, ENTER.  
If your Block Junk Fax setting is either Mode2 or Mode3, skip to step 3.  
J
1
If you want to enter or modify a number, press ENTER and go on to step 5.  
Otherwise, press /P ROGRAM and skip to step 10.  
Block Junk Fax:Off  
Program/Enter  
Depending on if you have already entered at least one number into the  
blocked numbers list, the display shows one of the following:  
5
6
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until you see your preference, Mode2 or Mode3.  
2
3
Enter Fax Number  
01:_  
Select BlockJunk No.  
01:555-2971  
Block Junk Fax:Mode2  
Program/Enter  
or  
If you want to modify an existing entry in the blocked numbers list, press  
or /P ROGRAM until you see the number you want to modify.  
… or …  
Press ENTER, ENTER. The display shows:  
Select BlockJunk No.  
01:555-2971  
If you want to enter a new number in an already-started blocked numbers  
list, press  
or /P ROGRAM until you find an empty position in the list.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until you see the number you want to clear.  
4
5
Then press ENTER to enter or modify the blocked number.  
Note: To clear a number from the list, see “Clearing a number from the  
Press CANCEL to clear the number.  
To clear another number from the blocked numbers list, repeat steps 4–5.  
Otherwise, go on to step 6.  
blocked numbers list,” right column.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the last eight characters of a fax number you  
want to block. For example, if you want to block a fax from someone with a  
Subscriber ID of 972-555-3038, you should enter 5, 5, 5, DIALING OP TIONS, 3, 0,  
3, 8:  
7
Press STOP. The display now asks if you want to print the blocked numbers  
list.  
6
Print BlockJunk Dial  
Enter/Stop  
Enter Fax Number  
01:555-3038  
If you do want to print the list, press ENTER and your machine will print it.  
Otherwise, press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.  
To change a specific digit, press  
until the cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the  
correct number.  
to move left or /P ROGRAM to move right  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The display shows the next “slot” in the  
blocked numbers list.  
If you do not want to enter or change a number for this slot, go on to step 9.  
If you do want to enter or change a number for this slot, repeat steps 5–8.  
8
9
Press STOP. The display now asks if you want to print the list.  
Print BlockJunk Dial  
Enter/Stop  
If you do want to print the list, press ENTER and your machine will print it.  
If you don’t want to print it, press STOP and your machine will return to  
standby mode.  
10  
2.61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Clearing a department code  
Using department codes  
You can keep track of how your machine is used through its department code feature.  
When the department code setting is activated, the machine reminds each user to  
enter the department code before sending or polling a document. The Activity  
Journal then keeps track of fax transactions by department.  
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Select Department No  
001:1555  
After you turn on this setting, assign specific code numbers to your office’s fax users  
and tell them to enter these department codes before sending faxes.  
Note: If department code operation is protected (see next page), the fax  
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn  
off the protection first, then repeat this step.  
Note: Please note that using this setting may block access to the fax machine.  
Press or /P ROGRAM until you see the code you want to clear. Here, we’ve  
selected “3111”.  
2
Entering a department code  
Your machine can hold up to 100 separate department codes.  
Press CANCEL.  
3
To enter a department code:  
3111:Erase Dpt. Code  
Check Program/Enter  
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 2, ENTER. Depending upon whether you’ve already  
entered a department code, the LCD shows:  
1
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without clearing the department code you’ve  
Enter Dept. Code  
001:_  
Select Department No  
001:1555  
selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax returns to step 2.  
or  
Press ENTER to clear the department code.  
4
Note: If department code operation is protected (see page 2.63), the fax  
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn  
off the protection first, then repeat this step.  
To clear another department code, repeat steps 2–4.  
If you don’t want to clear another department code, press STOP to return to standby  
mode.  
If you have not entered any codes in your fax, skip to step 4.  
Otherwise, go on to step 3.  
2
3
Turning the department code setting on and off  
To enter a new code in a department code list that’s already been started,  
press ENTER. The fax will skip to the next empty position in the list.  
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Dept. On/Off :Off  
Program/Enter  
Note: If you want to modify an existing entry in the department code, you  
first clear a department code you want to modify and then enter a  
new code (see “Clearing a department code,” right column).  
Note: If department code operation is protected (see next page), the fax  
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn  
off the protection first, then repeat this step.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit department code, 0000–9999.  
Here, we’ve entered 1555:  
4
5
Enter Dept. Code  
001:1555  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until you see the setting you want.  
2
3
Dept. On/Off :On  
Program/Enter  
To change one digit, press  
to move left or /P ROGRAM to move right until  
the cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct  
number.  
Press ENTER.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
To enter another department code, repeat steps 4–5.  
To stop entering department codes, press STOP to return to standby mode.  
2.62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the Basics  
Turning department code protection on and off  
Press START.  
4
5
Im p or ta n t: This feature will work only if you’ve activated the passcode protection  
Enter Dept. Code  
_
(see page 2.56).  
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate four-digit department code.  
In this example, we’ve entered 1234:  
Set Dept. Protect  
Enter Passcode: ****  
Enter Dept. Code  
1234_  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode:  
2
Set. Dept. Protect  
Enter Passcode: 6596  
Press START again.  
6
Printing the department time list  
The department time list includes the following information for each department  
code:  
To change one digit, press  
the cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct  
number.  
to move left or /P ROGRAM to move right until  
Press ENTER.  
•
•
•
Time period covered by the department time list  
3
4
5
Each department code  
Dept. Protect: Off  
Program/Enter  
Total communication time (in hours, minutes and seconds; HH:MM:SS) — Counts  
the communication time up to 999:59:59 (999 hours:59 minutes:59 seconds). If the  
fax exceeds the maximum time, it does not count further.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until the setting you want appears.  
•
Total printed pages — Counts the pages up to 65535 pages. If the fax exceeds the  
maximum number of pages, it counts the total pages from 0 (zero).  
Dept. Protect: On  
Program/Enter  
Note: If you want to clear the total counts of each department code, see “Clearing  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
the current department time list”, below.  
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, M, 4, ENTER.  
Sending a fax using a department code  
Note: If department code operation is protected (see left column), the fax beeps  
briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn off the pro-  
tection first, then repeat the above.  
For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
•
•
The four-digit department code must exist on your fax machine.  
You must know the department code.  
Clearing the department time list  
To clear the current total counts of each department code:  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 5, ENTER, ENTER.  
Enter the fax number by either pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-  
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad.  
The total communication time and total printed pages for each department code are  
cleared. The department code will not be erased.  
If you enter the fax number using a one-touch key, skip to step 6.  
Otherwise, go on to step 4.  
2.63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Tips on caring for your machine  
What to do if problems occur  
Glossary  
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1  
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12  
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Clearing paper jams  
To remove the document:  
If an original document jams  
If an original document jams, the LCD will show:  
Open the scanner cover by holding the  
scanner cover release.  
1
1
Document Jam  
ContStor Enter/Cancl  
Im p or ta n t: Hold the cover open. It  
won’t stay open by itself.  
If you do wish to continue the operation, press ENTER and proceed to step 2.  
To abort the operation, press CANCEL. This will delete from memory all pages  
stored during this operation, and the machine will return to standby mode.  
Im p or ta n t: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the  
machine will delete from memory all pages stored during this  
operation and the machine will return to the standby mode.  
Lift the original document from the  
machine.  
2
Note: If this document is a non-sorting ADF job (either copying or faxing), the  
machine will abort the operation anyway; instead, you’ll have to per-  
form the job again from scratch.  
Note: If you cannot remove the origi-  
nal document, open the inner  
cover as shown at right, then  
remove the document.  
The LCD will show which page (i. e., which page number) is jammed. To con-  
tinue scanning from the jammed page forward (keeping in mind the Note at  
2
the end of step 1, above), press START after clearing the jam.  
p 2. Reset Document  
Press Start Key  
Gently close the scanner cover, making sure both sides are snapped down  
securely.  
3
Note: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the  
machine will begin to send or copy the document(s) it has.  
Note: If the original document has become wrinkled or torn, do not re-send  
If you wish to cancel this operation, press STOP . The machine will delete all  
pages from memory and then return to its standby mode.  
it.  
3.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
If a printout jams inside your machine  
To clear a printout jammed inside your machine:  
Remove the jammed paper.  
4
5
Im p or ta n t: The fuser unit of orange  
color becomes very hot.  
Do n ot touch the fuser  
unit when you are remov-  
ing a paper jam.  
Open the top cover.  
1
Note: Avoid getting “unfixed” toner on  
your hands and clothes.  
Re-set the toner and drum cartridge.  
Open the printer cover.  
2
Gently close the printer cover.  
6
7
Gently close the top cover, pressing firmly on the both sides of the top cover  
until you hear it click.  
Remove the toner and drum cartridge.  
3
Im p or ta n t: Shield the drum cartridge  
from light, especially  
strong light. Later, if you  
have to remove the car-  
tridge from the fax,  
immediately wrap it in a  
thick cloth to protect it  
from light.  
3.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
If a printout jams inside at a paper cassette’s side cover  
Remove the multi paper tray.  
1
Open the side cover.  
2
3
Carefully remove the jammed sheet(s)  
from the machine.  
Close the side cover back into its normal position.  
4
3.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Print quality problems  
If your machine’s printouts develop quality problems, try to find the example below  
that matches your printout problem. When you find one which is like yours, try the  
suggested solutions. If they don’t work, contact your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Printouts are too dark  
•
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Pages are blank  
•
The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may not be  
installed correctly.  
Install each cartridge correctly.  
•
The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may  
be very low.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to  
redistribute the toner inside.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
•
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
Printouts have a blurred background  
•
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Pages are black  
•
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
•
Your fax machine’s printer may be due for a service check.  
Call your dealer.  
Printouts are of uneven density  
•
The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the  
toner cartridge.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to  
redistribute the toner inside.  
Printouts are too light  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
•
The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may  
be very low.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to  
redistribute the toner inside.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
•
The drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the drum cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.  
•
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
3.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Printouts have irregularities  
Printouts have toner smudges  
•
The paper you’re using may have absorbed moisture, per-  
haps due either to high humidity or water having been  
spilled on the paper supply. Toner will not adhere well to  
wet paper.  
•
The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the toner  
cartridge.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to  
redistribute the toner inside. If the problem persists, replace  
the cartridge.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ACDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Replace the paper with dry paper and try printing again.  
•
•
The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage. If the  
problem persists, replace either or both of the cartridges as  
indicated.  
If you find smudges on the back of the printouts, the trans-  
port roller may be dirty.  
Your machine normally cleans the transport roller automat-  
ically. If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized  
Muratec dealer.  
Printouts have white and/or black lines  
•
The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace either or both of the car-  
tridges as indicated.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
•
•
The LED print head may be dirty.  
Using the cleaning paper, gently clean the LED print head.  
Printouts have white spots  
•
The charger may be dirty.  
The charger may be dirty.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.  
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized  
Muratec dealer.  
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.  
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized  
Muratec dealer.  
Printouts have black lines or multiple streaks  
•
The toner cartridge may have been stored improperly.  
Try following procedure to clear up the problem:  
COP Y/F AX to change to the copy mode.  
1 Press  
ADF or FBS, remove it.  
2 If there is a document in the  
3 Open the book-cover fully.  
START to make a black copy.  
4 Press  
3.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Troubleshooting  
Occasionally, your fax machine encounters some trouble transmitting or receiving  
documents. When it does, it alerts you with an alarm. You can identify the problem  
with LCD messages and printed check messages and error reports, explained in the  
following pages.  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
Ch eck Rx Pa p er  
The paper cassette is out of paper. Add paper to  
the cassette.  
Ch eck Rx Pa p er Size  
Op en &Close Top Cover  
You’ve told your fax that the paper cassette  
holds legal-sized paper. If you try to use letter-  
sized paper without returning the pin to the  
upper holes (see page 1.10), your fax will sound  
an alarm and display the this message when  
you try to print. Put the pin in the proper holes.  
Alarm  
Your fax machine sounds an alarm tone — a series of short beeps — if either of  
these two problems occur:  
•
•
Trouble transmitting or receiving  
The machine is out of paper  
Ch eck # Of Pa ges  
You placed fewer pages into your fax machine  
than you indicated in your page-numbering set-  
ting (see page 2.35). Carefully recount the pages  
in your document, then re-try the transmission,  
being sure to enter the correct number of pages if  
you use the page-numbering function.  
LCD error messages  
What you see on the LCD  
All Com m a n d s In Use  
What it means/What to do  
Close Sca n n er Cover  
Close Top Cover  
The scanner cover is open. Close it.  
Your fax machine has all of its 99 possible  
delayed commands (automatic redialing counts  
as one) stored in memory and cannot accept  
another. Delete an existing command by using  
REVIEW COMMANDS, or wait until your fax has  
completed one of the delayed commands.  
The top cover is open. Close it.  
Close 1st Ca ssette  
The first paper cassette is open or has not been  
closed securely. Close it.  
Close 2n d Ca ssette  
Close 3r d Ca ssette  
Close 1st Sid e Cover  
Close 2n d Sid e Cover  
Close 3r d Sid e Cover  
The optional second paper cassette is open or  
has not been closed securely. Close it.  
Alr ea d y Stor ed  
You tried to enter a blocked number or depart-  
ment code which is already entered in the  
blocked numbers list for your fax machine.  
Enter a different blocked number or department  
code.  
The optional third paper cassette is open or has  
not been closed securely. Close it.  
The first paper cassette’s side cover is open or  
has not been closed securely. Close it.  
Box In Use  
You tried to erase a F-Code box which contains  
at least one document.  
Erase the document(s), then try again.  
The second paper cassette’s side cover is open or  
has not been closed securely. Close it.  
The third paper cassette’s side cover is open or  
has not been closed securely. Close it.  
Ca ll For Ser vice  
The scanner lamp is dim or inoperable.  
Make repeated copies to help evaporate any  
internal moisture. If that doesn’t resolve the  
problem, call your authorized Muratec dealer or  
Muratec Customer Support.  
3.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
Com m u n ica tion Er r or  
A communication error disrupted the reception  
or transmission. If you were transmitting, press  
STOP to clear the error message and then re-try  
the transmission. If you were receiving a fax, try  
to contact the other person and have him/ her re-  
try the transmission. (The problem may be  
En ter No. (1-99)  
You tried to request greater than 99 copies from  
your fax, which can create 1-99 copies of a docu-  
ment. Select the correct quantity and enter it.  
En ter Sca n Size  
Feed er In Use  
When you using the flatbed scanner (FBS), you  
must manually enter the scan size of your docu-  
ment. Press BOOK DOC SIZE to choose the size.  
entirely with his/ her machine, phone line, etc.)  
The command you’re trying to enter requires the  
use of the ADF, which is already in use. Wait for  
the machine to stop using the ADF, then try  
again.  
Cop y Off  
You tried to use your fax machine to make a  
copy, but the unit’s copy protection feature (page  
1.31) is on, preventing such use. Turn off copy  
protection.  
Ha n g Up P h on e  
In Rela y Box  
The optional handset is off-hook.  
Hang it up, making sure the upper part of the  
handset presses down on the “hook” button.  
Cop yin g Not Com p leted  
Dep t. Cod e F u ll  
You tried to switch to the fax mode by pressing  
COP Y/F AX during copying from the multi paper  
tray. Complete the copying first, then try again.  
You tried to store a document for polling in an  
F-Code box which is set to be a relay box.  
Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin  
box, then try again.  
You tried to enter department code more than  
100. Your machine can store up to 100 depart-  
ment codes.  
Docu m en t F u ll  
You tried to enter an document into an F-Code  
box, but the machine has reached its capacity.  
Delete documents stored in F-Code boxes until  
the machine will let you proceed.  
In Secu r e Box  
You tried to store a document for polling in an  
F-Code box which is set to be a security box.  
Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin  
box, then try again.  
Docu m en t J a m  
Con tStor En ter /Ca n cl  
An original document jam while you are using  
the ADF for either faxing or copying. See page 3.1  
for instructions on clearing the jam.  
In ser t Docu m en t  
There was no document in the document feeder  
when you tried to send a fax or make a copy.  
Place a document and try again.  
Docu m en t Stor ed  
Dr u m Nea r En d  
You tried to erase a batch box which contains at  
least one document. Erase the document(s), then  
try again.  
In va lid I.D. Cod e  
In va lid Nu m ber  
In va lid Pa sscod e  
The F-Code box  
Try re-entering your F-Code box  
I
.
D. code you entered isn’t valid.  
D. code.  
I
.
You pressed a key which has no function during  
the current operation.  
Your drum will need to be replaced soon.  
Press STOP to clear the message, then contact  
your authorized Muratec dealer to purchase a  
new drum cartridge if you don’t already have  
one.  
The protection passcode you entered isn’t valid.  
Repeat the operation, entering the correct protec-  
tion passcode.  
En ter No. (0-32)  
You tried to enter a call group number greater  
than 32. Your machine can maintain 32 call  
groups, numbered 1-32 (call group 0 covers all  
the groups). Determine the correct call group  
identifier number and enter it, instead.  
Lin e Bu sy  
You tried to erase a document which someone is  
polling from your machine. Wait for the fax to  
complete the polling operation, then try again.  
3.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
Mem or y Over flow  
En ter Or Ca n cel  
During transmission (or copying), you tried to  
enter more pages into memory than your fax  
could store. Press ENTER to tell your fax to keep  
as many pages in memory as possible, or press  
CANCEL to delete from memory all pages stored  
during this operation (but not previous opera-  
tions).  
No P IN Nu m ber  
You selected “Mode1” in the PIN mask feature  
and tried to call an autodialer number in which  
no PIN has been entered, or to call using  
numeric keypad without PIN. Enter a PIN, then  
try again.  
No Rep or t  
You requested an activity journal or confirma-  
tion report, but your fax machine has no record  
of any fax jobs having occurred.  
Mir r or Ca r r ia ge Er r or  
The mirror carriage of your machine has become  
inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer  
or Muratec Customer Support.  
No Ton er Ca r tr id ge  
The toner cartridge is missing or has not been  
properly installed in your fax machine. Please  
properly install the toner cartridge.  
Mir r or Lock ed  
No Com m a n d  
The transport mode is not turned off.  
Turn off the transport mode (see page 1.7, 1.12).  
Op en Top Cover  
P lea se Rem ove Pa p er  
Your fax machine has detected a paper jam in  
its interior. See page 3.2 for instructions on  
clearing the jam.  
You pressed REVIEW COMMANDS to review  
upcoming commands, but your fax machine had  
none stored.  
Op en 1st Sid e Cover  
P lea se Rem ove Pa p er  
Your fax machine has detected a paper jam  
inside the first cassette’s side cover.  
Open the cassette’s side cover and remove the  
jammed paper carefully.  
No Dep t. Cod e  
You tried to turn on the department code setting  
but there are no department codes stored in  
your fax machine. Store at least one department  
code, then try again.  
Op en 2n d Sid e Cover  
P lea se Rem ove Pa p er  
Your fax machine has detected a paper jam  
inside the second cassette’s side cover.  
Open the cassette’s side cover and remove the  
jammed paper carefully.  
. . . or . . .  
You entered incorrect department code at fax  
sending while the department feature is on.  
Enter correct department code.  
Op en 3r d Sid e Cover  
P lea se Rem ove Pa p er  
Your fax machine has detects paper jam inside  
the third cassette’s side cover. Open the cassette’s  
side-cover and remove the jammed paper care-  
fully.  
No Docu m en t Stor ed  
No Dr u m  
You tried to print a document from memory, but  
your fax machine had none stored.  
The drum cartridge is missing or has not been  
properly installed in your fax machine.  
Please properly install the drum cartridge.  
Op en & Close Sca n Cover  
Reset Docu m en t  
Either your document wasn’t inserted correctly,  
or the fax to which you’re sending can’t handle  
the document’s page length. Reset the page and  
try again.  
No Nu m ber Stor ed  
You selected an autodialer, batch box or F-Code  
box number for which there is no phone number  
programmed. Either choose another number or  
dial a phone number directly from the numeric  
keypad.  
P lea se Ca ll Ser vice  
The printer unit of your fax machine has become  
inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer  
or Muratec Customer Support.  
No Pa sscod e  
You tried to protect an operation or department  
code but there’s no protection passcode stored in  
your fax machine. Store a protection passcode in  
your machine, then retry protecting the operation  
or department code.  
P lea se Rep la ce Dr u m  
P lea se Rep la ce Ton er  
Your drum cartridge has reached the limit of its  
design life. Please replace the drum cartridge.  
Your toner cartridge is empty. Replace the toner  
cartridge.  
3.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
P lea se Su p p ly Pa p er  
The paper cassette or multiple paper feeder tray  
is out of paper. Add paper to the cassette and/ or  
the tray.  
Too Ma n y Ch a r a cter s  
You attempted to enter too many numbers or  
other characters in the current operation.  
Press CANCEL to delete the extra characters, then  
try again. You may wish to review the operation’s  
appropriate instructions.  
P lea se Wa it  
Your fax machine’s printer is either warming up  
or busy. Please wait until the fax is finished  
printing and then re-try your command or opera-  
tion.  
Too Ma n y Loca tion s  
You tried to enter too many numbers for a  
broadcast. You can enter up to 10 one-touch or  
speed-dial numbers and numbers entered  
through the numeric keypad.  
Press CANCEL to delete the extra numbers and  
then try again.  
Pollin g In Use  
You tried to store the polling document in your  
fax machine, where one already had been  
stored. Wait for the fax to complete the regular  
polling operation, then try again.  
Too Ma n y Step s  
You tried to enter too many steps for a macro.  
You can enter up to 60 steps into a macro key.  
P r in ter In Use  
The command you’re trying to enter requires the  
use of the printer, which is already in use. Wait  
for the fax to finish printing, then try again.  
1 Loca tion or Less  
You tried to enter too many forwarding numbers  
for fax forwarding through the numeric keypad.  
You can enter up to 201 forwarding numbers by  
using one-touch key, speed dial number, group  
number and numeric keypad, but you can enter  
only 1 location by using numeric keypad (see  
page 2.36).  
P r otect Doc. Stor ed  
A received document was in your fax’s memory  
when you tried to turn off the security reception  
passcode. Print the received document from your  
fax’s memory, then retry the desired operation.  
Rem ove Tr a y Pa p er  
Op en & Close Top Cover  
Your fax machine has detected a paper jam in  
the multi paper tray. See page 3.3 for instruc-  
tions on clearing the jam.  
Errors  
Sca n n er In Use  
The command you’re trying to enter requires the  
use of the scanner, which is already in use. Wait  
for the fax to complete the scan, then re-try the  
desired command.  
When sending faxes, your machine occasionally runs into communications errors.  
These can be caused by anything from lightning to telephone line interference.  
(These same factors cause the static, or line noise, you sometimes hear on phone  
calls.) They also can be caused by problems with the fax machine at the other end of  
the line.  
Stop Sca n n in g  
Con tStor En ter /Ca n cl  
You opened the top cover while the machine  
was scanning the document (for either faxing or  
copying) using the FBS. To continue the scan,  
press ENTER. To abort the scan, press CANCEL.  
Often, simply trying your call again is all that’s necessary. However, if the problem  
persists regularly, call your local telephone company for help. If that doesn’t help and  
the problem persists regularly, call your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Su b-a d d r ess In Use  
Ton er Low  
You tried to enter a sub-address identical to one  
already being used in another F-Code box. Enter  
a different sub-address.  
Error reports  
When an error occurs, your fax machine prints an error report. Each fax error report  
lists an error message which includes:  
Your fax machine is almost out of toner.  
Contact your authorized Muratec dealer to pur-  
chase a new toner cartridge if you don’t already  
have one.  
•
•
•
•
A possible solution to the problem  
The sending location (if the remote fax stores a Location ID of its own)  
The result — which is a special error code.  
A sample of the document’s first page.  
3.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
R.4.4 The fax machine has reached its memory capacity.  
Kinds of error codes  
The error code listed in the “Result” column of the error report indicates the specific  
problem encountered:  
R.5.1, ECM reception failed (perhaps due to line noise).  
R.5.2  
R.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.  
•
•
•
“
“
“
D” codes — Occur while dialing  
R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.  
R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.  
R” codes — Occur during reception  
T” codes — Occur during transmission  
Specific errors  
Following are some error codes you may see on an error report:  
Transmission errors  
T.1.1 The remote fax machine didn’t respond to your machine. Call someone at the  
Dialing errors  
remote machine’s location.  
D.0.3, The remote unit didn’t respond, the call couldn’t be completed or STOP was  
D.0.8 pressed during dialing. Re-try the call. If your machine repeats the message,  
call the remote fax unit’s operator and verify that unit is operating properly.  
T.1.2 Your fax machine’s page counter detected a possible document feeder error.  
Carefully put the document back into the feeder and try the call again.  
T.2.1 Either the phone line disconnected during transmission or fax communica-  
D.0.2 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.  
tion became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Try the call again.  
D.0.6, Either the remote unit didn’t respond, the call somehow didn’t go through or  
D.0.7 STOP was pressed during dialing. Try the call again.  
T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and  
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see “Glossary,” page 3.18) fax communication,  
the industry standard since the early 1980s.  
Reception errors  
T.2.3 Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions  
can change rapidly, so try the call again later.  
R.1.1 The calling fax machine didn’t respond to your fax machine. This can hap-  
pen if someone dials a wrong number or if the remote machine restricts  
access through use of a passcode.  
T.3.1  
The page counter in your fax machine detected a document feeder error dur-  
ing transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try  
the call.  
R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and  
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see Glossary, page 3.18) fax communication, the  
industry standard since the early 1980s.  
T.3.2  
The fax machine didn’t detect the silence indicating the call had ended.  
T.4.1 The telephone line disconnected during transmission because of excessive  
modem errors or because remote unit ran out of paper. Try the call again.  
R.1.4 Someone pressed STOP at the receiving fax machine.  
T.4.2 After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Try the call again.  
R.1.5 The fax machine didn’t detect the silence at the end of the call for receiving  
an RCR.  
T.4.4  
Poor line conditions prevented transmission. Try the call again.  
R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Call some-  
T.5.1, ECM transmission failed (perhaps due to line noise). Conditions can change  
T.5.2, rapidly, so try the call again later.  
one at the remote machine’s location.  
T.5.3  
R.3.1 The sending fax machine detected too many errors from the receiving  
fax machine.  
T.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.  
R.3.3 The sending fax machine is incompatible or had a document feeder problem  
during transmission.  
T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.  
T.8.11 The remote fax machine didn’t complete the equalizer training phase.  
R.3.4 Poor phone line conditions may have prevented your fax machine from prop-  
erly printing some or all of the pages it received.  
R.4.2 Either the line disconnected before transmission or the transmitting fax  
machine needs maintenance.  
3.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
“Check Message” printouts  
When there’s a problem with a fax call and your machine detects an error, it pro-  
duces an error printout headed by the words “Check Message.” This printout lists  
the following information about the transmission:  
•
•
•
The resulting error code  
A communications error message (see “What error messages can mean,” below)  
The phone number (or TTI, if programmed) of the fax machine with which your  
machine had attempted to communicate.  
What error messages can mean  
The error messages on Check Message printouts can mean a variety of things.  
Here’s a brief summary:  
Er r or m essa ge  
Possible m ea n in gs  
Check condition of remote fax. • Remote machine malfunctioned  
• No “handshake” signals from remote fax  
• Wrong phone number reached  
Repeat transmission.  
• Poor phone line conditions  
• No “handshake” signals from remote fax  
• Document misfeed or miscount  
• Unable to reach remote machine after  
attempting specified number of redial tries  
Line is busy.  
• Remote machine’s line was busy  
• Remote machine’s line didn’t answer  
Check received documents.  
• Remote confirmation signal not received  
from remote fax  
• Poor line conditions caused a poor image  
Memory full.  
• Remote fax’s memory is full  
Dialing number is not set.  
Stopped.  
• Stored phone number failed to dial properly  
• Someone pressed STOP at the remote fax  
in the middle of the “handshake”  
3.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Caring for your fax machine  
With proper installation and a little maintenance, your fax machine should give you  
dependable service for years to come.  
Corrective cleaning  
Here are some simple cleaning procedures for keeping your fax machine operating  
smoothly. Use each as the need arises.  
Although it requires little day-to-day care, you can take these simple precautions to  
keep it in top form:  
•
Alw a ys make sure your fax machine is installed according to our specifications,  
including using an electrical surge suppressor. (If necessary, review “Pick an  
installation spot,” page 1.7.)  
Curing frequent jams in the ADF  
If you’re having trouble with getting your original documents to feed properly, try  
this procedure:  
•
•
•
Alw a ys use good, copier-quality paper.  
Turn off your fax machine.  
Alw a ys clean your fax machine as needed (see “Cleaning tips,” below).  
1
2
Never install your fax machine where it can overheat, gather dust or get  
splashed by any liquids (even water).  
Get two soft, lint-free cloths and moisten them as follows:  
•
One with a cleaner suitable for use on platen/rubber rollers. In steps 4 and  
6, we’ll call this the rollers cleaner.  
•
The other with isopropyl alcohol  
Cleaning tips  
Open the scanner cover by holding the scanner cover release.  
Some things to keep in mind about cleaning your fax machine:  
3
4
Im p or ta n t: You must hold the cover open. It won’t stay open by itself.  
•
Do clean it! Dust and dirt, especially around the fax machine’s air vents can  
shorten your machine’s life.  
Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to clean the face of the rollers. Rotate  
the rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the entire roller surface.  
•
•
Alw a ys unplug the fax machine before you clean it.  
Never spr a y a n y clea n er DIRECTLY on to you r fa x m a ch in e. The drifting  
spray could damage components inside.  
•
•
•
•
Never tr y to clea n SEALED a r ea s in sid e you r fa x m a ch in e. They’re sealed to  
protect your safety and the machine.  
For cleaning external surfaces, such as the cover and handset: use a mild clean-  
ing solution sprayed onto a lint-free towel or cloth.  
Alw a ys use a lint-free cloth (or swabs) moistened with alcohol to gently wipe  
components inside your machine.  
In areas you can’t reach with swabs, a lw a ys use dry, dust-free compressed air to  
gently blow away dust and other material.  
3.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality  
Open the inner cover.  
5
6
Your machine automatically cleans its charger and transport roller, two items which  
are very important to printout quality. So, if you notice poor printout quality  
(whether on received faxes or on copies), it may mean that your machine requires  
service. Review "Print quality problems" (pages 3.4-3.5), and see whether any of the  
proposed solutions helps your machine. If none do, please call your authorized  
Muratec dealer or call the Muratec Customer Support Center at (972) 364-3350.  
Im p or ta n t: You must hold the cover open. It won’t stay open by itself.  
Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to  
clean the face of the rollers. Rotate the  
rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the  
entire roller surface.  
Cleaning the LED print head  
If you find your fax recipients complaining that the faxes you receive or copy image  
quality are streaked, the LED print head may be dirty.  
Turn off your fax machine.  
1
2
Use the cloth with isopropyl alcohol to  
clean the contact glass.  
7
8
Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it  
with isopropyl alcohol.  
Im p or ta n t: You must hold the cover  
open. It won’t stay open  
by itself.  
Open the top cover and then open the  
printer cover.  
3
Gently close the scanner cover, making  
sure both sides are snapped down  
securely.  
Im p or ta n t: The fuser unit of orange  
color becomes very hot.  
Do n ot touch the fuser unit when you are cleaning the LED  
print head.  
Cleaning the FBS  
Using the cloth, gently clean the LED print head.  
4
Note: Do n ot use abrasive materials on the LED print head.  
Open the book cover.  
1
Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it with isopropyl alcohol.  
2
Im p or ta n t: Make sure the cloth doesn’t have any rough areas. Otherwise, it  
Storing the toner and drum cartridge(s)  
Follow these guidelines when you store the machine’s toner and drum cartridges.  
could scratch the glass surface of the FBS.  
Using the cloth, gently clean the glass  
surface of the FBS and the white back-  
ground area on the underside of the  
book cover.  
•
•
Do not unpack a cartridge until you are ready to install it.  
3
Store cartridges at a constant temperature within a range of 23ºF to 95º F. (-5º to  
35º C.), as well as a humidity range of 10% to 80%.  
3.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Common questions  
Sending faxes  
Q: Sometimes, I try to send a fax while using either the optional handset or the  
MONITOR/CALL feature. But, when the other side answers, I hear a horrible  
screeching sound, so I hang up. What’s happening?  
We’re here to help you!  
The Muratec Information System is available to you 24 hours a day, 7 days a  
week. You can use your fax machine to call this “fax-on-demand” system and  
receive printouts of information, such as the most common questions asked  
about your machine. Often, this is the fastest way to find out the answer to  
any question you may have. And it’s a free call!  
A: That was the other fax machine trying to say “Hello” to your machine! You’ll  
hear sounds like that any time you call a fax machine which is set to answer  
automatically (as when you set your machine to Auto Answer mode). It’s by  
using these tones that fax machines are able to send faxes over ordinary phone  
lines. So, next time you hear the tones, press START (and, if you’re using an  
optional handset, hang up) to send a fax.  
To use the Muratec Information System:  
On your fax machine, press MONITOR/CALL to get a dial tone, or lift  
your optional handset.  
1
Q: I just sent a fax. However, the number that appeared in my machine’s display  
Call 1-800-215-1698.  
2
3
during the transmission wasn’t the number I dialed. Why?  
Follow the voice instructions you’ll receive from the system.  
A: That number you saw is programmed into the remote fax machine by the user.  
Some users prefer different numbers to appear than the ones they’re really  
using. And some people don’t know how to change the number once it’s set.  
General questions  
Q: Where do I add ink or toner to make my fax machine’s printouts darker?  
Q: Can I transmit and receive at the same time?  
A: No. Use the call request feature (see pages 2.34–2.35) to ask the person at the  
remote fax machine if he or she wants to transmit or receive after your fax  
communication is complete.  
A: You can’t adjust the darkness of an incoming fax printout, but you can adjust  
the darkness of a copy or of a transmission. Insert a document and press CON-  
TRAST to adjust the contrast setting. “Dark” prints at the darkest setting. The  
machine will reset automatically to normal contrast after you finish copying or  
sending the fax.  
Q: Do I have to dial a 1 for a long-distance call?  
A: Yes. Dialing a fax number is just like dialing any other phone number, so be  
sure to include any special long-distance codes or dialing pauses when dialing.  
Also, remember to include them when you set your autodialer numbers.  
Q: When I unplug my machine or if the power goes off, will I lose the information  
I’ve stored — such as my TTI, autodialer entries, the time and date, etc. — and  
have to re-enter them?  
A: No. There’s a special battery built into your fax machine which protects user  
settings for several days if power fails or if you decide to move your machine.  
However, we do advise you to restore power to the machine as soon as possible.  
Q: How do I send a fax to an overseas telephone number?  
A: Dialing requirements for international calls may vary depending on your local  
telephone company’s requirements. For most international calls, call 011, then  
dial the appropriate country code, city code and phone number. (You may find  
country and city codes in the front section of your telephone directory.)  
Q: Can I use a dust cover on my fax machine?  
A: No! A dust cover blocks air circulation, which could cause your machine to over-  
heat.  
Q: Can I transmit if my fax machine runs out of paper?  
A: Yes, but confirmation reports (see page 2.30) aren’t available when you trans-  
mit without recording paper in your fax machine.  
3.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Q: The specifications (page AI.1) list an average per-page transmission time, but  
Q: Can I transmit a document that’s extra long?  
when I transmit a page it can take much longer. Why?  
A: Yes, if the receiving fax machine is equipped to handle long documents. Many  
machines have a special setting which allows them to receive documents that  
exceed the normal length.  
A: We base this specification on transmission of an industry-standard test docu-  
ment called ITU-T Test Document 1 (sometimes also called the “Slerexe letter”).  
Fax manufacturers use this method to test transmission speeds. However:  
Q: Can I transmit a page from a newspaper?  
•
The pages you send may be darker, or otherwise contain more information,  
than ITU-T Test Document 1.  
A: No. A newspaper page can jam in your document feeder. First, use a copy  
machine to make an appropriately sized copy of the newspaper page, then  
transmit the copy.  
•
The transmission time measured for test documents doesn’t include hand-  
shake time — the time during which two fax machines “introduce”  
themselves to each other and “agree on” the parameters of the call.  
Q: Can I transmit a page with correction fluid on it?  
•
The specification time is based on the use of normal resolution mode. You  
may be using fine, superfine or grayscale transmission, each of which takes  
longer than normal mode.  
A: Yes, but only if the fluid is completely dry before you begin transmission.  
Q: How can I be sure my fax was received?  
Q: What’s a default?  
A: Set your machine to print a confirmation report after each transmission (see  
A: A default is a setting that your machine will always refer to if nothing else is  
programmed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a  
fax by using its memory. If you set this action as the default, that’s how your  
machine will always send a fax, until you tell it to do differently.  
pages 2.30).  
Q: I don’t want to install a dedicated phone line for my fax machine, so I’ve con-  
nected the machine to a PBX phone system. When I get a fax call, all the phones  
ring. How do I prevent this?  
A: Call your PBX manufacturer or telephone company for assistance. They may be  
able to convert one of the PBX lines for use only by your fax machine.  
Reports  
Q: Sometimes when I dial a fax call by using either the optional handset or  
MONITOR/CALL, I don’t hear the fax receiving tones from the other machine.  
Am I doing something wrong?  
Q: I called the number 011-555-555-1212, but not all of the digits appear on my  
transmit confirmation report (TCR). Why didn’t the whole number appear? How  
can I be sure my document went to the right location?  
A: When this happens, try pressing START (and then hanging up the optional  
handset if you’re using it), as usual. It’s possible you’re calling an older, non-  
standard fax machine that doesn’t emit answering tones. Even a few Group 3  
faxes (see “Glossary,” page 3.18) on the market sound a sending tone but don’t  
sound a receiving tone. After you transmit, call the person at the other fax  
machine’s location to see if that person got your document.  
A: The numbers you enter using the fax keypad are temporarily stored in a mem-  
ory “buffer”, and it’s only the last part of the phone number that the buffer  
“remembers.” An easy way to avoid getting incomplete telephone numbers on  
your printouts is to store your most frequently used numbers as one-touch keys  
or speed-dial numbers. These autodialer numbers will appear in their entirety  
on your TCR.  
Q: I inserted a document in the feeder and dialed a fax number, but my machine  
didn’t transmit the document. Instead, “** Auto Redial **” now appears on  
my LCD. What does this mean?  
A: The remote fax machine was busy, so your machine will try the call again, auto-  
matically. As long as it hasn’t stored more than 99 delayed commands (counting  
automatic redials), your machine should still accept commands from you. If it  
has exceeded this quantity and will accept no more commands, try cancelling  
one of the delayed commands (see pages 2.18). If the machine still won’t cooper-  
ate, keep cancelling commands until it does.  
3.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Receiving faxes  
Q: My fax never answers. What’s wrong?  
Polling  
Q: What’s the purpose of polling?  
A: Check to make sure your fax machine is properly connected to a working AC  
power outlet and phone jack (see page 1.12). If you’re using a second phone  
with your machine, make sure it’s connected properly (page 1.14).  
A: Polling lets you automatically “pull” a document which is set in another fax  
machine. You can poll whenever you need to retrieve information and don’t  
want the source to pay for the phone call. With polling, you pay for the call and  
get the information you need.  
Q: Sometimes when I answer my machine with the optional handset, I hear a  
beeping sound that repeats every few seconds. Is this a fax?  
A: Yes. When you hear these fax tones, someone is trying to send you a fax. Next  
How your fax machine works  
How a fax machine works is simple:  
time, press START and hang up the handset. Your fax will receive the message.  
Q: Does my fax machine have to be plugged in to the AC power jack to receive a  
You put a page into your fax machine’s feeder and call a fax number. Your machine  
makes a satisfactory connection with the other machine, and then …  
message?  
A: Yes. Your phone will ring if the phone line is connected, but you can’t receive a  
fax unless your fax machine is plugged into both the phone jack and the AC  
power jack. Make sure your fax machine is always plugged in so you never miss  
an important fax message.  
•
Your machine takes the document.  
An image scanner in your fax machine examines the information on the page.  
•
Your machine wraps the document.  
Your fax machine translates the scanned information into a numeric code and  
compresses the code for the fastest possible transmission speed.  
Q: Can I receive a fax if I’m using the phone on my machine?  
•
Your machine sends the document.  
Finally, your fax machine sends the compressed code.  
A: You can receive a fax from the person to whom you’re talking. When that per-  
son has a document ready in his/her machine’s feeder, press START.  
On the other end of the line …  
•
•
The remote fax machine receives the code.  
Working with your answering machine  
Your machine unwraps the document.  
The remote fax machine uncompresses and deciphers the code, turning it into a  
representation of the scan your machine made.  
Q: People have complained that they call my fax machine and hear my answering  
machine’s message, but are cut off before they can send a fax. What happened?  
A: Any remote fax machine attempting to send a fax must “hear” responding fax  
tones within 40 seconds after the person at that machine presses the start key.  
That 40 seconds includes getting the dial tone, dialing the number, “listening”  
to the pause before the ringing starts and the remote fax machine answering  
the ring. Only after that time does your message play.  
•
The remote fax machine prints the representation.  
The only difference between a regular telephone call and a fax call is the content of  
the transmission:  
That’s why we urge you to create a short outgoing message. The shorter the  
waiting period, the more likely it is that the remote fax machine will proceed  
with the transmission. Please create an outgoing message on your answering  
machine that’s no longer than 10 seconds (see page 1.27 for a suggestion).  
•
•
On a regular call, your telephone sends your voice.  
On a fax call, your fax machine sends a coded image.  
The way fax machines work is regulated closely by the International  
Telecommunications Union (ITU), an agency of the United Nations. The standards the  
ITU applies ensure the compatibility of your fax machine with millions of other  
machines worldwide. However, they also limit the way you can use your machine  
with other devices, such as telephones and answering machines.  
3.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Glossary  
This glossary contains terms you may encounter when discussing or reading about fax  
machines. Please use these definitions for reference only. A list of definitions can also be  
found on the Muratec website at www.muratec.com.  
Br oa d ca st — A fax transmission in which a single document is sent to more than one loca-  
tion.  
bp s — Bits per second. Used to express the speed of transmission of data. Because fax trans-  
mission treats a document as a graphic image rather than as a series of alphabetic and  
numeric characters, bps does not correspond to the number of characters transmitted per sec-  
ond.  
24-h ou r for m a t — Also called military format. A format for keeping time that does not use  
a.m. or p.m. to distinguish between morning and afternoon. In the 24-hour format, one o’clock  
in the morning marks 1:00, noon marks 12:00 and midnight marks 24:00. To calculate the 24-  
hour format, add 12 hours to all times after noon.  
Byte — A group of digital elements, usually sent as eight bits to the byte.  
Ca ll r eser ve — Also called call request. An ITU-T standard fax feature which allows a user to  
For example, 1:30 p.m. would be 13:30 in the 24-hour format; 10:45 p.m. would be 22:45 in the  
request voice communication prior to, during or after transmission.  
24-hour format. And 11:15 a.m. would be 11:15 in the 24-hour format.  
Ca ll-w a itin g ser vice — An optional telephone company service that alerts you to another  
incoming call when the phone is already in use. Call-waiting signals often cause interruption  
of fax transmission or reception.  
A3, A4, B4 — Standard stationery sizes defined by the International Standards  
Organization, an agency of the United Nations. See also Paper sizes.  
ADF — Automatic document feeder. See document feeder.  
Ca ller ID — Optional service provided by your local telephone company that allows you to  
see a display of the number (phone or fax) that is calling.  
Alter n a te n u m ber — The number your machine dials after all attempts to the regular  
number fail. The user programs this alternate number, if so desired.  
CCITT — See ITU-T.  
An sw er in g m a ch in e — See TAD.  
CCD, CIS — Charged coupled device, contact image sensor. Two types of scanning mechanisms  
used in some Muratec fax machines. The CCD “reads” fluorescent light bouncing off a docu-  
ment. The CIS uses a flat bar of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).  
Au tod ia lin g — Enables user to store preprogrammed telephone numbers in the unit’s mem-  
ory. Storage capability varies from unit to unit.  
Com m a n d qu eu e — The “list” your machine keeps of all its pending commands.  
Au tom a tic fa llba ck — The ability of a fax machine to slow down (“fall back”), when commu-  
nicating with another fax which is communicating at a slower rate.  
Com m a n d n u m ber — The number your machine gives to each “job” it is programmed to  
complete. You must know the command number in order to cancel or change any of the  
machine’s jobs that it stores.  
Au tom a tic r ed u ction — Many Muratec fax machines will automatically reduce the size of  
documents being transmitted to accommodate the effective printing width of the receiving  
unit. For example, this allows a fax machine with a 10″ scanning width to send an image 10″  
wide to a unit with an 8.5″ print width. The receiving fax machine will receive a reduced-size  
printout of the complete image.  
Com p a tibility — The term “compatible” describes the ability of separate things to function  
together. Your Muratec fax machine features ITU-T Group 3 compatibility, the modern stan-  
dard for worldwide communication.  
Bit — The smallest unit of information in a computer. Some Muratec fax machines, which  
are actually computers “dedicated” to telecommunications, allow users to change bits of infor-  
mation to provide or cancel features through software settings.  
Con fid en tia l tr a n sm ission — See SecureMail.  
Con fir m a tion r ep or t — See RCR and TCR.  
Con tin u ou s p ollin g — See Polling.  
Bits p er secon d — See bps.  
Cop y m od e — Allows your fax machine to be used as a convenience copier.  
Bla ck d en sity — Also called black coverage. The amount of non-white area on a page. For  
example, most regular office correspondence has a black density well under 10%, due to the  
presence of margins, spaces between words, spaces between lines and paragraphs and even  
spaces within letters. However, drawings and photographs have a much higher black density,  
sometimes approaching 100%. The higher a page’s black density, the more slowly a fax  
machine sends it.  
Cover p a ge (a u tom a tic) — A small, user-created message; can be the first page of every  
transmission.  
Da ta ba se p ollin g — See Polling.  
Da ta com p r ession — Used in digital fax machines to speed transmission. See also Digital  
fax, MH and MSE, SMSE.  
3.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Defa u lt — The setting your machine will always refer to if no other action has been pro-  
Gr a ysca le — Not a level of resolution, but a method of scanning and transmitting halftone  
images. Fax machines with grayscale abilities interpret photographs in  
levels of gray between white and black. The transmitting fax machine must have grayscale  
ability to send a photographic image accurately, but the receiving machine does not need it to  
print the image.  
grammed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a fax by using its  
memory. If you set this action as the default, that’s how your machine will always send a fax,  
until you tell it to do differently.  
Dela yed com m a n d — Transmission or polling operation set by the user to occur later, auto-  
matically, at a predetermined time. Great for reducing costs by making fax calls during times  
when telephone costs are lowest, such as late at night or on weekends.  
Gr ou p 3 — Refers to fax machines that use digital encoding. These units transmit one page  
in less than one minute and produce resolution of 203 × 98, 203 × 196, or 406 × 392 lpi.  
Digita l — Using the binary system (which uses a combination of 0s or 1s) to describe every-  
thing, so that 0 means off and 1 means on; digital fax machines convert the graphic image of  
your document into a series of zeros and ones by using the binary system of transmission to  
encode black and white occurrences. This increases transmission speed by passing over white  
spaces. See also White-line skip.  
Ha lfton e — See Grayscale.  
Ha n d sh a k in g — An exchange of data between telecommunications and/or  
computer equipment that “introduces” two systems to each other. For example, faxes use a  
handshaking protocol to identify the ITU-T group of each unit and to begin fax communication.  
Hu b — See Relay broadcasting.  
Digita l fa x — Unlike analog systems that scan every portion of a document, digital fax  
machines survey a document’s overall picture content. Digital fax machines scan a line and  
convert the information into a binary code of zeros and ones. The fax machine takes this  
information and compresses it, providing high transmission speeds. Many Muratec units  
offer proprietary methods for faster transmissions between Muratec-manufactured units (see  
also MSE, SMSE).  
Hz (or Her tz) — A measure of frequency equal to one cycle per second. Used in the specifica-  
tions for a fax machine, it identifies the AC power the unit requires.  
ITU-T — International Telecommunications Union – Telecommunications Sector. (Formerly  
known as CCITT, for Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone.) A  
telecommunications forum for member countries of the United Nations whose Study Group  
XIV established the primary groups for fax equipment, covering communication protocol and  
transmission. Muratec Group 3 fax machines offer the fastest transmissions allowed by the  
ITU-T when communicating with other Group 3 units.  
DIP sw itch es — Dual in-line package switch; a two-position on/off switch. Many Muratec fax  
machines include DIP switches to control optional settings or features.  
Docu m en t feed er — The adjustable slot into which users place documents for faxing or  
copying.  
ITU-T Test Docu m en t 1 — Also called the Slerexe (“slehr-rehks”) letter; An ITU-T standard  
document with a known black density which fax makers often use to test transmission  
speeds of their fax machines. Published transmission speeds are also based on this document.  
Effective p r in tin g w id th — The widest image that can be printed on a fax.  
Effective sca n w id th — The maximum width the scanner in a fax can scan during trans-  
mission.  
ITU-T V.29 a n d V.27 ter. — A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax  
machines to talk to all other units adhering to those standards.  
F -Cod e — A fax-industry standard created by the ITU-T for sub-addressing/password-based  
communications. Because F-Code is an industry standard, Muratec fax machines as well as  
all ITU-T equipped fax machines from other manufacturers can communicate with each other  
using sub-addressing.  
J BIG — Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T standard image data compression  
method. As J BIG compresses the data more efficiently than MMR, it is especially effective when  
transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.  
(Of course, the compression ratio may vary with the image data.)  
Fa csim ile (or fa x) — A form of communication involving the scanning and decoding of a docu-  
ment into electrical signals and transmitting of the document, over telephone lines to another  
device. This device then reconstructs the signals to produce an exact duplicate of the document.  
Also, a machine that performs such communication.  
La ser p r in tin g — A plain-paper printing system. Toner is attached to a charged drum and  
an image is transferred onto plain paper through electrical currents, then fused with heat  
and pressure to produce a dry, permanent printout.  
LCD — Liquid crystal display. Used on some Muratec units for status displays.  
Fa llba ck — Group 3 fax machines operate at the highest transmission speed possible on a  
given telephone line. Muratec systems offer automatic fallback; if line quality drops during  
transmission, the fax machine will reduce speed to the fastest possible level.  
Lea sed lin e — See Private line.  
Loa d n u m ber — A number assigned to telecommunications equipment used in Canada;  
designed to help prevent overloading on a telephone circuit. See also Ringer equivalence num-  
ber.  
File n u m ber — A number the machine gives to each document it stores for a batch, F-Code  
or polling operation.  
Loca tion ID — See Station ID.  
Fin e r esolu tion — 203H × 196V lpi. Also shown as  
G
3
F
(“Group 3 fine”) on some fax units.  
lp i — Lines per inch. The way fax image resolution is measured. (For example, see Normal  
resolution.)  
3.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Mem or y — Internal document storage. In Muratec fax machines, random access memory in  
the form of computer chips is used to store and hold documents for transmission and to hold  
some documents that have been received.  
Pa p er sizes — All are width × length:  
Letter-sized = 8.5″ ×11.0″ (216 × 279 mm)  
A5 = 5.8″ × 8.3″ (148 × 210 mm)  
A4 = 8.3″ ×11.7″ (210 × 297 mm)  
A3 = 11.7″ ×16.5″ (297 × 420 mm)  
Legal-sized = 8.5″ ×14.0″ (216 × 356 mm)  
B5 = 7.2″ ×10.1″ (182 × 257 mm)  
Mem or y over flow — A message that appears on the machine’s LCD when the  
current operation requires more of the machine’s electronic memory than what is available.  
B4 = 10.1″ ×14.3″ (257 × 364 mm)  
Pa sscod e — A four-digit code-number. On your fax machine, the protection passcode lets the  
user limit access to fax operations, as well as certain settings and even documents readied for  
polling (in the case of polling, only calling machines whose users enter the proper passcode  
will be able to poll the document.)  
MH — Modified Huffman, the standard ITU-T Group 3 data compression method. A one-dimen-  
sional coding scheme that compresses data in a horizontal direction only. A feature of all  
Muratec fax machines, MH assures transmissions faster than one page per minute when com-  
municating with other Group 3 units, regardless of  
manufacturer. See also MR, MMR, MSE, SMSE.  
P BX (or PABX) — Private branch exchange; privately-owned telephone equipment serving a  
particular building, business or area. Many PBX systems use digital transmission lines which,  
unlike more common PSTN lines, are not compatible with fax machine use. The user should  
not connect a fax unit to a PBX without first checking with the system manufacturer or ser-  
vice representative.  
Milita r y for m a t — See 24-hour format.  
Mod em — Modulator-demodulator. A device that converts digital data, like information from  
a fax machine, into an analog signal for transmission over ordinary telephone lines. A modem  
is included in a fax machine and allows it to be connected directly to a PSTN telephone line.  
P CL — Page Control Language. An industry standard for printer control. Some Muratec fax  
machines include or offer PCL-compatible printing for Windows-based personal computers.  
MR — Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-dimen-  
sional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions and  
allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless of  
manufacturer. See also MH, MMR, MSE, SMSE.  
P la ten — A traditional copier-style top to a fax machine or digital copier. Some Muratec fax  
machines and multifunctional products include a platen top, allowing you to fax from books  
and other awkward sources.  
MMR — Modified Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-  
dimensional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions  
and allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless  
of manufacturer. See also MH, MR, MSE, SMSE.  
Pollin g — Automatic transmission to a calling remote fax, or reception of a document from a  
remote fax set for this operation. Polling is convenient whenever a central unit must receive  
information from one or several remote faxes. The caller bears all telephone charges and pre-  
vents several remote units from calling at the same time. See also Secure polling.  
Mon itor — A speaker in most Muratec fax machines which allows the user to hear the dial-  
ing process. This is not a speakerphone, because it has no microphone for speaking to the  
person being called. For regular two-way voice communication, users must use the optional  
handset. See also On-hook dialing.  
P r iva te lin e — (Or leased line.) A service offered by many telephone systems; provides an  
exclusive phone circuit between two geographic points. A Muratec fax does not require a pri-  
vate line. See also PSTN.  
P r op r ieta r y — Non-standard. In fax, refers to a fax feature which works only in communi-  
cations between fax machines that are the same brand.  
MSE, SMSE — Muratec’s proprietary data compression methods, allowing a Muratec-manufac-  
tured fax machine to transmit more quickly when communicating with another  
Muratec-manufactured unit. MSE and SMSE are features on many Muratec fax machines. See  
also MH, MR, MMR.  
P STN — Public switched telephone network; the most common type of telephone lines and  
service in use, in contrast to private or leased lines. A Muratec fax provides fast, reliable data  
transmission over a PSTN line, and does not need a special or dedicated telephone line. See  
also Private line.  
Qu a d Access® — Muratec’s QuadAccess allows your Muratec fax machine to perform four or  
more tasks simultaneously without slowing.  
Nor m a l r esolu tion — Shown as “norm”; 203H × 98V lpi. The default resolution mode for all  
Muratec fax machines.  
On e-tou ch d ia lin g — Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialing  
with the touch of one key. See also Autodialing and Speed-dialing.  
RCR — Receive confirmation report. An RCR is your assurance that the document you trans-  
mitted was received. The RCR prints after your transmission, identifying the receiving unit  
and recording the date, time, transmission mode, number of pages sent and the result. The  
RCR is an exclusive feature of Muratec fax machines and is available only when transmitting  
to other, compatible Muratec fax machines. See also TCR.  
On -h ook d ia lin g — Dialing numbers by using the keypad on the fax unit without lifting a  
handset. On most Muratec fax models, the user can do this either silently or by using the  
monitor. See also Monitor.  
Or igin a l d ocu m en t size — The largest (or smallest) document that can be fed safely  
through a fax machine.  
Receiver ID — See Station ID.  
Over r id e — To change existing settings.  
3.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
Red ia lin g — The dialing again, either manually or automatically controlled, of the most  
Su p er Gr ou p 3 — An extension of Group 3 fax technology standards, allowing the use of  
high-speed v.34 bis modems for 33.6 Kbps transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid  
handshaking.  
recently dialed fax or phone number. Automatic redialing follows an unsuccessful dialing  
attempt and can be done manually or automatically.  
Rela y br oa d ca stin g — Lets some Muratec fax machines store a document in internal mem-  
ory, transmit the document to the memory of a remote “hub” fax and then instruct that unit  
to relay (re-transmit) the document to each fax in a call group in the “hub” unit. This feature  
speeds extremely high-volume fax communication and allows a single command to initiate  
document transmission to hundreds of preprogrammed fax locations. It also saves phone  
charges for the originating machine. Your machine can initiate a relay broadcast.  
Su p er fin e r esolu tion — 203H × 392V lpi. Your Muratec fax machine’s superfine transmis-  
sion mode is Group-3-compatible, not the more limited proprietary version.  
TAD — Telephone answering device, or answering machine. Records incoming voice messages  
for playback. You can connect a TAD to a Muratec fax machine and use the two on one phone  
line.  
TCR — Transmit confirmation report; this provides proof that your Muratec fax did send the  
document you set for transmission. Printed after transmission, the TCR also identifies the  
telephone number to which the fax sent the document, plus the actual time of transmission  
and how many pages the unit transmitted. See also RCR.  
Rem ote fa x m a ch in e — The machine on the other “end” of a fax communication.  
REN — See Ringer equivalence number.  
Resolu tion — The resolution of documents transmitted or copied by fax machines is mea-  
sured by the number of horizontal (H) and vertical (V) lines per inch (lpi) the unit can print. A  
Muratec unit may offer one or more of these resolution levels:  
Th er m a l (p a p er ) p r in tin g — A thermal head heats chemically treated, thermally sensitive  
paper in patterns conforming to the image the machine has scanned, creating a printed  
image. Thermal paper’s tendency to discolor and fade, in addition to its curliness and the  
usual difficulty in writing on it, have made this method considerably less popular than plain-  
paper fax printing — particularly as plain-paper fax machines have dropped sharply in price.  
Normal  
Fine  
Superfine 203H × 392V lpi  
203H  
203H × 196V lpi  
×
98V lpi  
Tr iAccess — Muratec’s TriAccess allows a Muratec fax machine to perform three or more  
tasks simultaneously without slowing.  
Some Muratec units also offer grayscale transmission (see also Grayscale) for accurate repro-  
duction of photographs and other shaded originals.  
TTI — Transmit terminal identifier. A user-programmable line of information sent automati-  
cally with every page a fax machine sends; it appears at the top of each page printed by the  
receiving unit.  
Rin ger equ iva len ce n u m ber — Also called REN. A number assigned to telecommunications  
equipment used in the United States; designed to prevent overloading on a telephone circuit.  
See also Load number.  
Tr a n sm ission sp eed — How fast a fax machine is sending a fax document. This speed  
depends upon the modem speed of each unit, the resolution setting, the content of the docu-  
ment, the encoding technique and the condition of the phone line (clean, noisy, etc.) Any  
change in any one of these five conditions will affect the speed, sometimes significantly.  
Sca n n in g w id th — See Effective scanning width.  
Secu r eMa il — Allows a Muratec fax user to send a document to or receive one into (usually  
something confidential) an “electronic mail box.” The transmission is protected at the receiv-  
ing Muratec fax by an access code; the receiving fax prints the document only when an  
authorized user enters the code.  
V.29 a n d v.27 ter — A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax machines to  
talk to other units using those standards. Specifically, these standards cover fax transmission  
at 9600 bps or slower.  
Secu r e p ollin g — Polling in which preset passcodes are checked between two machines  
before polling is allowed to take place.  
V.34 — An international standard for fax modems — and other modems — with transmission  
speeds of up to 28.8 Kbps. The V.34 protocol is sometimes referred to as “V.Fast”, because it  
represented a significant increase in possible transmission speed compared to the transmis-  
sion protocol it replaced.  
Sp eed -d ia lin g — Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialing with  
the touch of three keys — an identifier key (either * or #) and then a three-digit code — for  
each number. See also Autodialing and One-touch dialing.  
Sta tion ID — (Also called Location ID or Receiver ID.) An autodialer feature which lets the fax  
user enter a descriptive name to correspond with the number in an autodialer entry. For  
example, rather than entering only 1-972-555-3465, the user can enter that number and a  
name, such as Dallas Branch Office. (Many Muratec models with this feature allow entry of  
both upper-case and lower-case letters, for greater ease of reading.)  
V.34 bis — A faster version of the V.34 standard, and sometimes referred to as “V.34 Plus” or  
“V.34 +”. The V.34 bis protocol allows transmission at up to 33.6 Kbps, and represents the cur-  
rent maximum standard transmission speed possible under ITU-T Group 3. (The term “bis” is  
French, and designates the “second” version of the protocol.)  
Wh ite-lin e sk ip — A technique used to speed up fax transmission by bypassing redundant  
areas, such as white space.  
Su ba d d r essin g — An ITU-T standard allowing fax machines to specify special delivery  
characteristics of a transmission. For example, subaddressing allows fax machines from dif-  
ferent manufacturers to send and receive messages into confidential memory mailboxes, or to  
retrieve specific files from polling memory.  
Su bscr iber ID — A fax machine’s telephone number, as identified by a user setting. See TTI.  
3.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case …  
This page intentionally blank.  
3.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Specifications  
Polling/Broadcasting:  
Transmission speed:  
230 locations / 230 locations  
2.85 seconds per page.*  
Gen er a l  
Type:  
Desktop plain paper facsimile  
Compatibility:  
Phone System:  
ITU-T Super Group 3, Group 3  
Docu m en t in p u t  
Document Set:  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or  
equivalent  
ADF :Face Up  
FBS :Face down  
Dual access:  
One-Touch Dial:  
Speed Dial:  
Multitasking  
72 locations  
128 locations  
Original reference position:  
Scanning Resolution:  
ADF :Center  
FBS :Front right corner  
(horizontal × vertical):  
Transmission:  
Op er a tin g En vir on m en t  
Environmental Temperature: 50º F to 89.6º F (10º C to 32º C)  
Normal  
Fine  
Superfine  
203 × 98 dpi  
203 × 196 dpi  
406 × 392 dpi**  
Relative Humidity:  
20 to 80% RH  
Grayscale 203 × 196 dpi (Memory Tx)  
406 × 392 dpi** (Feeder Tx)  
Pow er r equ ir em en t:  
Pow er con su m p tion :  
Power: 120V ± 10%, 50–60 Hz.  
Copy:  
Normal  
Fine  
203 × 98 dpi  
203 × 196 dpi  
406 × 392 dpi  
Standby  
:
19 W  
:1180 W  
51 W  
Maximum  
Memory Transmit  
Receive  
Superfine  
:
Grayscale 406 × 392 dpi  
: 830 W  
: 840 W  
Reading Method:  
Scanning width:  
Flatbed CCD  
Copy  
11.6 inches***, 9.9 inches or 8.2 inches; user-selec-  
table  
Com m u n ica tion  
Coding Method:  
ITU-T-standard J BIG, MMR and MR, Murata-pro-  
prietary MSE.  
Document size :  
(width × height)  
ADF; single sheet:  
Modem speed:  
33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600,  
19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800,  
2,400 bps  
Maximum 12.0 inches × 35.4inches,  
Minimum  
4.7 inches × 3.9 inches  
ADF; two or more sheets :  
Error Correction Mode:  
Memory Capacity:  
Yes  
Maximum 11.7 inches × 16.5 inches,  
Minimum  
5.8 inches × 4.1 inches  
8MB, Option 8MB (Maximum 16MB)  
FBS  
Memory Backup Time:  
(Total memory capacity: Backup time)  
8MB : 120 hours  
Maximum 10.1 inches × 14.3inches  
16MB: 60 hours  
(Must be charged for at least 48 hours to reach full  
charge)  
ADF capacity:  
50 letter-sized sheet, 25 legal-sized sheet or  
15 ledger-sized sheet (20lb bond paper)  
35–104.7 g/m2 (13–24 lb.)  
Document thickness:  
AI.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
*
Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine. Your transmission times will vary,  
but your Minolta fax machine always will provide the fastest transmission speeds possible under ITU-T guide-  
lines and phone-line conditions.  
Scanning speed:****  
Normal:  
Fine:  
1.9 sec/page (Tx)  
1.9 sec/page (Tx), 1.9 sec/page (Copy)  
Super Fine: 3.8 sec/page (Tx), 3.8 sec/page (Copy)  
Grayscale: 1.9 sec/page (Tx), 3.8 sec/page (Copy)  
** In the case that the remote fax has the ability of “406 × 392”.  
If not, the superfine resolution is “203 × 392”, and the grayscale resolution in feeder transmission is “203 × 196”.  
*** Using ADF only.  
Grayscale:  
256-level in feeder Tx or copy, 64-level in memory Tx  
**** Based on letter-sized sheets (width × length, 8.5″ ×11″ (216 mm × 279 mm)).  
***** Only for Copy mode  
Docu m en t ou tp u t  
Print destiny:  
406 dpi (horizon) × 392 dpi (Vertical)  
Within 20 sec.  
Warm-up time:  
Paper exit system:  
Printing method:  
Face up exit system  
LED scanning, Electrophotographic Dry Powered  
Image Transfer to plain paper  
Effective print width:  
Effective print length:  
Print speed:  
210 mm (8.3 inches)  
Letter 10.7 inches, Legal 13.7 inches  
12 ppm (Based on letter-sized paper)  
Reduction Print:  
Auto (Variable from 100% to 50% by 1% ratio)  
Fixed (100%, 97%, 91%, 81% or 75%)  
Reduce and enlarge:*****  
Variable from 50% to 200% by 1% ratio  
Fixed (200%, 129%, 78%, 64% or 50%)  
Smoothing Print:  
Paper type:  
Yes  
Ordinary plain paper 60–90 g/m2 (20–24 lb)  
Printing paper size:  
Paper cassette; Letter or Legal  
Multi paper tray; Letter, Legal or Half-letter  
Paper capacity:  
Paper cassette; 400 sheets  
Multi paper tray; 1 sheet  
Receiving paper tray capacity: 150 sheets  
Miscella n eou s  
Weight:  
75.2 pounds (34.2 Kg)  
Dimensions :  
Width 20.9 × Depth 24.2 × Height 15.2. (inches)  
20,000 pages  
Drum cartridge life:  
Toner cartridge life:  
10,000 pages (4% coverage)  
Based on 4% document coverage and continuous printing.  
AI.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Regulatory information  
If problems arise  
United States of America  
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remote it from your telephone  
line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily  
stop service. When practical, they will notify you before this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be  
notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and will be  
informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) information  
Ringer Equivalence Number (RENs): AC REN, 0.5B DC REN, 0.3.  
;
This facsimile machine has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
A
digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a  
residential installation.  
In the event repairs are ever needed on your fax machine, they should be done by Muratec America, Inc., or an  
authorized representative of Muratec America, Inc. For information, contact the Muratec Customer Support Center at  
972-364-3350 (from the U. S. only).  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
Canada  
If this equipment causes interference in radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equip-  
ment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Industry Canada (IC) regulations  
•
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
IC Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.4.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class  
interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.  
A
limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among  
other information, the FCC registration number and REN for this equipment. If so requested, you must provide this infor-  
mation to the telephone company.  
Classe  
A
prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques,” NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre  
des Communications.  
Notice: The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means  
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements.  
The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug are provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be  
connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part-68-compliant.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local  
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.  
Sometimes, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended with a certified  
connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with these conditions  
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Telephone company procedures  
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally  
have to make changes in its equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the oper-  
ation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes  
necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the  
supplier. Any equipment malfunction, or repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
If you have any questions about your telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the  
telephone company will provide this information upon request.  
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you about the  
equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC  
registration number and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment which is connected to your line. Both  
of these numbers are listed on the equipment label attached to your fax machine.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines  
and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important in  
rural areas.  
Ca u tion : Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric  
The sum of all RENS on your telephone line should be fewer than five (5) in order to assure proper service from the tele-  
phone company. Sometimes, a sum of five (5) may not be usable on a given telephone line.  
inspection authority or electrician.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number  
of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combi-  
nation of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5. The IC REN  
for your equipment is 0.4.  
Note:  
This equipment is hearing-aid-compatible (HAC).  
Notice: The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other  
electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains,  
either in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the  
date and time it was sent and an identification of the business or other identity, or other individual sending  
the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, entity or individual. For  
instructions on programming this information (the “TTI”) into your fax machine, see pages 1.15–1.16.  
Type of service  
Your fax is designed for use on standard-device telephone lines. The fax connects to the telephone line with a standard  
line called the USOC RJ -11. Connection to telephone-company-provided coin service (central-office-implemented systems).  
Connection to party line service is subject to State tariffs.  
AI.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Limited warranty  
T
his warranty is made by Muratec America, Inc. (hereafter referred to as “Muratec”). This warranty is  
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH ABOVE, AND EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW  
MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM COURSE OF  
DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE), AND MURATEC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED HEREIN. IN THE  
EVENT THE PRODUCT IS NOT FREE FROM DEFECTS AS WARRANTED ABOVE, THE CUSTOMER’ SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE  
,
MURATEC  
valid only on Muratec products purchased and used in the United States of America. This warranty  
applies to the product only while owned and used by the original purchaser (“Customer”). If ownership of  
the product is transferred, this warranty terminates. This warranty does not apply to any product in use  
for rental purposes.  
A
S
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MURATEC BE LIABLE TO THE CUS-  
TOMER, OR TO ANY USER, FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES,  
LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE MURATEC  
PRODUCT, EVEN IF MURATEC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
Some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, and some  
States do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclu-  
sions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other  
rights which vary from State to State.  
This Muratec product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for ninety (90) days com-  
m encing t h e da t e of origin a l Cust om er pu rch a se. If t h e produ ct is defect ive in m a t eria l a nd/or  
workmanship (normal wear and tear excepted) during the warranty period, Muratec or its authorized rep-  
resentative will, during Muratec’s established service availability hours, make necessary adjustments and  
repairs, including, at Muratec’s option, installation of replacement parts. Muratec’s service availability  
hours are 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Central time) Monday through Friday, excluding Muratec-recognized holi-  
days. Muratec will complete the necessary adjustments and repairs within a reasonable time period, as  
dictated by the nature of the problem and by Muratec’s service schedule. Replacement parts may have  
been used and/or reconditioned. Parts that have been replaced will remain the property of Muratec. This  
warranty is subject to the OBLIGATIONS and EXCLUSIONS set forth.  
Obligations  
1. This warranty will be honored only on presentation of the original dated authorized Muratec bill of sale  
or Muratec dealer bill of sale or sales slip to an authorized Muratec service representative or service  
center. For the name of your authorized service center, contact Muratec (from the United States, call  
1-972-364-3350; from Canada, check your in-box materials for the number to call).  
2. During the warranty period, the Customer must notify Muratec by telephone of any defective product  
material and/or workmanship.  
3. Transportation (including prepayment of freight and insurance charges) of the product to and from an  
authorized service center, designated by Muratec, is the responsibility of the Customer.  
4. If Muratec provides maintenance or responds to a call which is outside the scope of this warranty, such  
maintenance shall be billed to the Customer at Muratec’s then-current rates for maintenance and  
parts and shall be due and payable in full upon receipt of invoice.  
Exclusions  
1. This warranty shall not cover a product with missing or altered original identification marks.  
2. This warranty applies only to products that the purchaser has properly installed, adjusted and oper-  
ated in accordance with the instructions set forth in or provided with product literature. This warranty  
does not apply to any product which has been subjected to tampering, alteration, misuse, abuse,  
neglect, improper installation or transportation damage. Nor does it apply to costs for any service  
requested for demonstration or to confirm proper operation of this product.  
3. The warranty shall not apply to adjustments, repairs or replacements necessitated by any cause  
beyond the control of Muratec (whether foreseeable or not) including, but not limited to, any malfunc-  
tion, defects or failure caused by or resulting from any of the following: improper unpacking or  
installation, unauthorized service or parts, or improper maintenance or cleaning, modification or repair  
by the Customer, accident (including, without limitation, unavoidable accidents), fire, flood or other  
Acts of God, improper telephone or electrical power or surges thereof, interconnection with or use of  
non-compatible equipment or supplies (including paper), or placement of the product in an area which  
does not conform to Muratec space, electrical and/or environmental requirements.  
4. Muratec will not be required to make adjustments, repairs or replacements if the product is installed or  
used at a location deemed by Muratec to be hazardous to health or safety, or if Muratec is not provided  
with free and reasonable access to the product and a telephone during service availability hours, or if  
the product location is not accessible by an authorized Muratec service vehicle.  
AI.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Index  
Department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62-2.63  
Distinctive ring detection (DRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33  
Document, guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17  
Drum cartridge, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8-1.9  
A
Automatic document feeder (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3  
Auto answer light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Alarm light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29  
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-2.15  
One-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-2.11  
Speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-2.14  
E
EasyDial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32, 2.15  
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15-1.16  
ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4  
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3.9  
B
Book-cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3  
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20  
Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60-2.61  
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16  
F
Flatbed scanner (FBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3  
Fax Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35-2.37  
F-Code communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38  
an introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38  
Bulletin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42-2.45  
Creating or modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38-2.42  
Erasing an empty F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45-2.46  
F-Code transmission and polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46-2.47  
Printing a list of F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42  
Relay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45  
Security box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44-2.45  
C
Communication light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Call groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-2.15  
Printing a call group directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14  
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34  
Canceling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18  
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12-3.13  
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-3.3  
Closed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60  
CODE key, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2  
Confirmation stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5  
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17, 2.1  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28  
Copy protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31  
Enlargement or reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31  
Making copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28  
Using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29  
Using the FBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29  
Using the Multi paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30  
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28-2.37  
G
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17-3.20  
Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.17  
H
Half-page reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3  
I
Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3  
J
Jammed paper, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-3.3  
Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29  
D
Date and time, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15  
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Printing a delayed command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19  
Printing a stored document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19  
Reviewing or canceling delayed commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18  
L
Liquid crystal display (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
AI.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Location ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
R
Replace paper light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24  
Review Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23  
an introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23  
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22, 1.32  
Reception modes  
M
Memory receive light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Machine setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25-2.37  
Multi paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3  
Ans/Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26-1.27  
Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25  
Fax/Tel Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25  
Tel Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24  
Tel/Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26  
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.3  
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30  
Receive confirmation report (RCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30  
Transmit confirmation report (TCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30  
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.17, 2.1  
Rings, setting number on which to answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4  
N
Number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4  
Numbering pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
O
One-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-2.11  
Out-of-paper reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27  
P
Paper jam light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
Attaching a second phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
Attaching an optional handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32  
PIN mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57-2.59  
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31  
Being polled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32  
Continuous polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32  
Regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31  
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-3.5  
Print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2  
Print reduction rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2  
Reduction margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3  
Printing machine setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48-2.55  
Erasing a programmable one-touch key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54-2.55  
Fax dialing with programmable one-touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54  
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55  
Programming a batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51  
Programming a broadcast / group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49-2.50  
Programming a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48-2.49  
Programming an F-Code transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52-2.53  
Programming F-Code polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53-2.54  
Programming regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50-2.51  
S
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7-1.14  
Adjust the monitor speaker’s volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Attach the paper-handling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
Attaching a second phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
Attaching an optional handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Installing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Setting for legal-sized paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Plug in and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12  
Removing the transport screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Turn off the transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12  
Scan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
Primary contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
Primary resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
Scanning width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
Scanner cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3  
Scanning width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56-2.63  
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56-2.59  
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17-1.23  
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17  
Using memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18  
Using monitor/call or a handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21  
Using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19  
Using the FBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20  
Setting security transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59  
Silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4  
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24-2.37  
Special Dialing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Q
QuadAccess® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37  
Quick Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31  
AI.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24-2.37  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1-AI.2  
Speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11-2.14  
Storing the toner and drum cartridge(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
Subscriber ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16, 2.59, 2.60  
T
Toner cartridge, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8-1.9  
Transferring documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17-1.23  
Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15  
Transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3.11  
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6-3.9  
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9-3.11  
V
Volume setting for monitor speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
W
Warranty, limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.4  
AI.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
This page intentionally blank.  
AI.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
This page intentionally blank.  
AI.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
This page intentionally blank.  
AI.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

National Mower Lawn Mower 68 DL User Manual
NEC Projector PX700W User Manual
NEC Telephone NDK 900 User Manual
Nikon Digital Camera 13187 User Manual
Nortel Networks Switch 8672A User Manual
Omega Vehicle Security Power Supply LDN PS User Manual
Panasonic Air Conditioner HQ 2243TH User Manual
Panasonic Camera Accessories AJ HPX2700 User Manual
Panasonic Network Card MAS3132D User Manual
Panasonic Typewriter KX W900 User Manual